Loading...
2015 PROJECT MANUAL..VOLUME 2 • • ' JEFFERSON COUNTY ' CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX 0 SMA prof.no_1311 BOULDER, MONTANA • o �G��ERLD I�BF T 2 • f_ • r r • M ^ • RACK � s YJASON N.SOAMS y prepared yy_ ' �WSn Y'T ]I S M A'�HITECfS /CF 4era. eD ARGN\ • Schienker&nnc[m Architects, FC. [SMAI • 02- 12-2015 2 Winne Avenue, Suite 1 • Constrtxton F"eva, nor--oml • Documents (406)442-4933 • • • • i VOLUME 2 i • � rr ` a • - • /^1 • - • • set-no. 2-. • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC- 1 • JEFFERSON COUNTY • • CLERK & RECORDER OFFICE • BOULDER, MT • • • CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS • • Table of Contents/ Index • • Enumeration of Drawings. Specifications and Addenda: The following are the Specifications and Drawings, and Addenda which form a part of this Contract: • • VOLUME 1 • PDA thru PD-2 Project Directory • IB-1 thru IB-2 Invitation for Bids PRC-1 thru PRC—3 Proposal Requirements and Conditions • AEC-1 thru AEC 2 Award and Execution of Contract • SFA-1 Standard Form of Agreement Pages 1 thru 8 SAMPLE AIA Document A101-2007 • RL-1 Release of Liens Page 1 SAMPLE AIA Document G706A— 1994 • PGC— 1 thru PGC - 3 Proposal For General Contract • GC-1 Contract General Conditions Pages 1 thru 38 SAMPLE AIA Document A201 —2007 • SC-1 thru SC-10 Supplementary Conditions • SPC-1 thru SPC-3 Special Conditions PWR-1 Prevailing Wage Rates • Pages 1 thru 19 Current 2013 Montana Prevailing Wage Rates • • DIVISION 01 SECTION SECTION TITLE 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • 011000 SUMMARY 012300 ALTERNATES • 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES . 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SAMPLE AIA G702 APPLICATION &CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT • SAMPLE AIA G703 CONTINUATION SHEET • 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES • 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS • 014200 REFERENCES 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& ECORDER ANNEX • TA LE OF CONTENTS TOC-2 • 016000 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS • 0173001 EXECUTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES • 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA • 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS • DIVISION 02 • SECTION SECTION TITLE 020000 SITE • Pages I tutu 40 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT • DIVISION 03 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • 034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE • DIVISION 04 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 042113 BRICK MASONRY • DIVISION 05 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061600 SHEATHING • 061753 SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION • 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY • 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED-ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS • DIVISION 07 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 072100 THERMAL INSULATION • 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS • 073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES 074600 SIDING • 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM • 079200 JOINT SEALANTS • DIVISION 08 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES • 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • TABLE OF CONTENTS • TOC - 3 • 084113 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0854131 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS • 087100 1 DOOR HARDWARE • 088000 GLAZING • DIVISION 09 SECTION SECTION TITLE • 092900 GYPSUM BOARD • 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES • 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING • 096813 TILE CARPETING 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING • 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING • 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING • DIVISION 10 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 101423 PANEL & DIMENSIONAL SIGNAGE • 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES • • VOLUME 2 • • DIVISION 22 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING • 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING • 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT • 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION • 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING • 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 0 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES • 223400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 224213 PLUMBING FIXTURES • • DIVISION 23 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC • 230713 DUCT INSULATION • 231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 233113 METAL DUCTS • 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • TA LE OF CONTENTS TOC-4 • 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS • 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 2354001 FURNACES • 236200 1 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS • 238239 1 UNIT HEATERS • DIVISION 26 • SECTION SECTION TITLE 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES • 260526 GROUDNING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES • 262416 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES • 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING • 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING • DIVISION 27 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM • 270528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 271300 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING • 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING . • DIVISION 28 • SECTION SECTION TITLE • 280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY ANDSECURITY • 280526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY ANDSECURITY 280528 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM • COMcheckT" BUILDING ENVELOPE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE COMcheckT MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE • COMcheckT LIGHTING COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE • AMP • SHEET SHEET TITLE . COV COVER • CIVIL • C1.0 EXISTING TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY& DEMOLITION PLAN C2.0 SITE &GRADING PLAN • C3.0 CIVIL DETAILS • ARCH. • A0.0 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN • A1.0 WALL/ROOF/CEILING/WINDOW/ DOOR TYPES • • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-5 • A1.1 CODE REVIEW PLAN A2.0 FLOOR PLAN A2.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN . A2.2 FINISH AND SIGNAGE PLAN A2.3 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS A3.0 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS • A4.0 BUILDING SECTIONS A4.1 BUILDING SECTIONS A5.0 WALL SECTIONS . A5.1 WALL SECTIONS A6.0 DETAILS A6.1 DETAILS A7.0 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS . A7.2 DETAILS A7.3 DETAILS • STRUCT. S1.0 GENERAL NOTES S1.1 FOUNDATION PLAN . S2.1 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S3.1 SHEAR WALL PLAN & DETAILS S4.1 TRUSS PROFILES • S51 DETAILS S5.2 DETAILS MECH. M0.1 MECHANICAL COVER SHEET M2.1 HVAC FLOOR PLAN • M3.1 PLUMBING PLAN M5.1 MECHANICAL SECTIONS M6.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS • M7.1 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES • ELECT. • E1.1 ELECTRICAL COVER SHEET E2.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN E3.1 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E4.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E7.1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E8.1 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM • End of TOC • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517- 1 SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING • PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY . A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • PART 2- PRODUCTS • 2.1 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 531A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated. Provide with integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc • coated, with plain ends. C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. . D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering . products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 1. Advance Products& Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. • 3. Metraflex Company(The). • 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc. • • B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space • between piping and sleeve. . 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. • SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517- 1 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX . SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR LUMBING PIPING 220517 -2 • 2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. • 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant oating, or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements • PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION • A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, r ofs, and walls. B. It is this contractor's responsibility to accurately set necessary sleeves for ipe before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and to tion of all openings including coordination with the other trades. • C. Each sleeve shall be utilized for only one pipe. Block outs for multiple pipe or individual pipes are not allowed unless indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Archit ct. D. On insulated systems install sleeves to allow for continuous insulation wh re sleeve-seals are not required. • E. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of ize large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and ails. • 1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. • F. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walh as new slabs and • walls are constructed. • 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. • a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical quipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. • 2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls ithout sleeve-seal system. • G. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior cast concrete or CMU partiti ns. • 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular cl ar space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requir ments for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." H. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, c ilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials or appro ed firestop sleeve- seal. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 0 8413 'Penetration • Firestopping." • 3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs- n-grade at service • piping entries into building. • • • SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 -2 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517-3 B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. 3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: • a. Piping Smaller Than NIPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NIPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. 2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NIPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system . • 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 2) Provide water stop. b. Piping NIPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 2) Provide water stop. • 3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: . a. Piping Smaller Than NIPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 2) Provide water stop. b. Piping NIPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system. • 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 2) Provide water stop. . 4. Concrete Slabs above Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NIPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or PVC-pipe sleeves. • b. Piping NIPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or PVC-pipe sleeves. 5. Interior Partitions: SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 -3 • w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX • ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1 SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING • PART 1 -GENERAL • • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: • w 1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates. • PART2 -PRODUCTS • . 1.3 ESCUTCHEONS • A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener. • B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. • C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. 1.4 FLOOR PLATES A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. • • PART 3 -EXECUTION • 1.5 INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors. • B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening. • 1. Escutcheons for New Piping: • a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. . b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. C. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast- brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. • ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& R CORDER ANNEX • ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518-2 f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, st-brass type with ! polished, chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. h. C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. ; D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD • that completely covers opening. ! 1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type. • 1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials. END OF SECTION 220518 • ! • ! • • • • • ! • • ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 -2 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519- 1 SECTION 220519- METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY w A. Section Includes: 1. Light-activated thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments. 5. Test plugs. w 6. Test-plug kits. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building. 2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping"forwater meters inside the building. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHT-ACTIVATED THERMOMETERS A. Direct-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flo Fab Inc. b. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. C. Trerice. H. O. Co. . d. Weiss Instruments. Inc. e. WIKA Instrument Corporation- USA. f. Winters Instruments- U.S. 2. Case: Plastic; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 3. Scale(s): Deg F. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 5. Connector: 1-1l4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519- 1 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-2 6. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. , a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 7. Display: Digital. 8. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 deg F. 2.2 THERMOWELLS A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion intc piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNT. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NIPS 1/2, NIPS 3/4, or NIPS 1, ASME 81.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and lubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 2.3 PRESSURE GAGES A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, avai able manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, . the following: a. AMETEK. Inc.: U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. C. Marsh Bellofram. d. Noshok. e. Weiss Instruments. Inc. f. WIKA Instrument Corporation -USA. g. Winters Instruments- U.S. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. M 3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom- outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. w 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. w 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scaler nge. . METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -2 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519- 3 2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4, ASME 81.20.1 pipe threads and porous- metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping. B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 114, ASME 131.20.1 pipe threads. 2.5 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Milioco Corporation. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co.. Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company. Inc. w 6. Trerice. H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.: a div. of Watts Water Technologies, In 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. D. Thread Size: NPS 112, ASME 131.20.1 pipe thread. E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber. 2.6 TEST-PLUG KITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Milioco Corporation. 3. National Meter. Inc. w 4. Peterson Equipment Co.. Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company. Inc. 6. Trerice. H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8. Weiss Instruments. Inc. • B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s)containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. C. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F. D. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -3 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK 8 RECORDER ANNEX METERS AND GAGES FOR DILUMBING PIPING 220519-4 E. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical p sition in piping tees. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and ilted positions. F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position. G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids. H. Install test plugs in piping tees. I. Where thermometers are to be placed where a light activated thermometer receives no light such as behind access panel, under counter, within a very dark mechanical room, provide a dial type thermometer. J. Install thermometers in the following locations and where shown on the drawings: 1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. ! 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller. K. Install pressure gages in the following locations and where shown on the dr wings: 1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump. L. Install test plugs in the following locations and where shown on the drawing : 1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller. • 5. Building water service entrance into building. 6. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 7. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump. w 8. Inlet and outlet of each thermostatic mixing valve. w METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-4 40 w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-5 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following: 1. Direct-mounted, light-activated type. w 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be the w following: 1. Direct-mounted, light activated type. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be the following: 1. Direct-mounted, light-activated type. w 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall be the following: ! 1. Direct-mounted, light-activated type. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length. 3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F. B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F. w C. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F. 3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE • A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following: w Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case. • 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. w B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following: 1. Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case. w 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following: 1. Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. w METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519- 5 • w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-6 3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE w A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 200 psi. B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping downstream of pressure-reducing 1 alve: 0 to 100 psi. w C. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping upstream of pressure-reducing val e: 0 to 200 psi. • END OF SECTION 220519 w w w w w w • • • w • w • • • w • • w • • w w w w • METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-6 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523- 1 SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron ball valves. 3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 4. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves. 5. Bronze swing check valves. 6. Iron swing check valves. 7. Iron, grooved-end swing check valves. R 8. Iron, center-guided check valves. 9. Chainwheels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 220553 'Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment' for valve tags and schedules. 2. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping. 3. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping. 4. Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this piping. 5. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this piping. 6. Section 221513 "General-Service Compressed-Air Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. Lead Free: Refers to the wetted surface of pipe, fittings and fixtures in potable water systems that have a weighted average lead content:50.25% per Safe Drinking Water Act. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523- 1 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR DILUMBING PIPING 220523 -2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. w B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME 816.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME 831.9 for building services piping valves. , C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. NIE F/ANSI-372 for lead free valves. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: • 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew pc int temperature. If • outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertigh enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. All valves shall be Lead Free (ASTM listed) and shall be made wit corrosion-resistant materials. Manufacturer shall provide upon request third party certification tested in accordance with EN ISO 6509 regarding dezincification corrosion resistance and stress orrosion cracking. C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. . D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. w E. Valve Actuator Types: w 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NIPS 6 and smaller. 49 4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the"Valve Installation"Article. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-2 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING a. 220523 - 3 F. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. G. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME 816.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. w 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME 816.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. w H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve. Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.: Apollo Valves. C. Crane Co. Crane Valve Group: Crane Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Lance Valves a division of Advanced Thermal Systems. In f. Legend Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red-White Valve Corporation. j. Watts Regulator Co.: a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: w a. Standard: MSS SP-110. ! b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. C. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: ASTM B61, B62 or B584 Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. w h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. k. All components shall be"Dezincification Resistant' I. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" 2.3 IRON BALL VALVES A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves: w w s GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523- 3 • w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-4 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve. Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.: Apollo Valves. , C. Ritz Corporation. w d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co. a division of Watts Water Technologies, In t. w 2. Description: w a. Standard: MSS SP-72. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. w C. Body Design: Split body. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. In. Ball: Stainless steel. i. Port: Full. j. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free' w 2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES w A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, availa le manufacturers w offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, bui are not limited to, the following: w a. ABZ Valve and Controls: a division of ABZ Manufacturing. Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.: Apollo Valves. . C. Coo er Cameron Valves a division of Cooper Cameron Corr>or tion. d. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Stockham Division. f. DeZurik Water Controls. w g. Flo Fab Inc. ! h. Hammond Valve. i. Kitz Corporation. j. Legend Valve. k. Milwaukee Valve Company. I. NIBCOINC. M. Norriseal: a Dover Corporation company. n. Red-White Valve Comoration. o. Spence Strainers International a division of CIRCOR Internatior al Inc. w p. Watts Regulator Co.: a division of Watts Water Technologies, In t. w 2. Description: w a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. w b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. w C. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange, w d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile it n. • GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -4 w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523- 5 e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One-or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze. h. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" 2.5 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Kennedy Valve: a division of McWane. Inc. b. Shurioint Piping Products. C. Tyco Fire Products LP: Grinnell Mechanical Products. S d. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig. C. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. f. Seal: EPDM. w g. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" 2.6 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve. Inc. b. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Stockham Division. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. w h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Zv-Tech Global Industries, In 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. C. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B61, B62, or 8584 bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. g. All components shall be"Dezincification Resistant' GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-5 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING • 220523 -6 a♦ h. All components shall be certified"Lead-Free" w 2.7 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers . offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Jenkins Valves. . C. Crane Co.: Crane Valve Group: Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Ritz Corporation. • f. Legend Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. • I. Watts Regulator Co. a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. M. Zv-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. . b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. h. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" 2.8 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES w A. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, i the following: w a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Shurioint Pioing Products. C. Tyco Fire Products LP: Grinnell Mechanical Products. i d. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. CWP Rating: 300 psig. w b. Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron. C. Seal: EPDM. d. Disc: Spring-operated, ductile iron or stainless steel. e. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" • GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-6 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-7 2.9 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. c. Crispin Valve. d. DFT Inc. e. Flo Fab Inc. f. GA Industries. Inc. g. Hammond Valve. h. Metraflex. lnc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. Mueller Steam Specialty: a division of SPX Corporation. k. NIBCO INC. I. Spence Strainers International: a division of CIRCOR International, In M. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. n. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. o. Watts Regulator Co.: a division of Watts Water Technologies. Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. ! C. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Compact wafer. e. Seat: Bronze. • f. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" 2.10 CHAINWHEELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 2. Roto Hammer Industries. 3. Trumbull Industries. B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain. 1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve. 2. Attachment: For connection to ball and butterfly valve stems. 3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for valve. Include zinc coating. w 4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -7 R i JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523- 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and c rrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. w B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guid s and seats made accessible by such operations. w C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Chec bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is . suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. . E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arrange to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessa . C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install chainwheels on operators for ball and butterfly valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Center-Guided Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, betweE n flanges. G. When soldering use paste flux that are approved by the manufacturer for use with Lead Free Alloys. 3.3 ADJUSTING w A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but . before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occ irs. w 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug)type. 3. Throttling Service: Calibrated balancing valves as specified in Division 22 Section . "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" or butterfly valves provided it is installed with an adjacent flow indicator. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -8 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ® 220523-9 Will 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: lis a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves. C. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or spring. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. op C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: R 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve- , end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve- end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 7. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. 3.5 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG OR LESS) A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze or stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, NBR seat, aluminum-bronze or stainless-steel disc. 3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP. 0 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 5. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP. 6. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, compact-wafer, metal seat. 7. 3.6 DOMESTIC, HOT-AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze or stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-9 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 10 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NIPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150. 3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, al minum-bronze or stainless-steel disc. 4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 6. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP. 7. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, compact-wafer, metal s at. w END OF SECTION 220523 w w • w • • • w i i w w w w • w • �1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 10 • w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT . 220529- 1 * SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND ! EQUIPMENT rPART 1 -GENERAL !�! 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. ! 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield and shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Pipe positioning systems. 8. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. ! 2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors. 3. Section 220548 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices and seismic requirements. A1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCEISEI 7. (� 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1 A JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING ND EQUIPMENT 220529 -2 ` 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and perso nel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ' A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated corn nents. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation ad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carb r steel . B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copp r-coated steel . 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- . bolts. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, bul are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube &Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line Inc. w C. Flex-Strut Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. w f. Unistrut Corporation: Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco. lnc. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for upporting multiple parallel pipes. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 -2 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-3 + 3. Standard: MFMA-4. !1� 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel . 7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc, Hot-dipped galvanized or equivalent.. 2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD AND SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: • 1. Carpenter& Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. . 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields. Inc.: a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products. Inc. 7. Piping Technology& Products. Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co.. Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyan u rate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig, ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and jacket. D. Jacket or Vapor Barrier: Shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke- developed index of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. E. Shield: Provide a minimum G-90 galvanized steel thermal-hanger shield for all shield inserts. F. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. G. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. H. Insert, Jacket and Vapor Barrier Length: Extend 1 inches beyond sheet metal shield on each end for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS • A. Fastener Systems shall be one or both of the following as allowed by the structural drawings and specifications: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless- steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities R appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-3 r JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 -4 2.6 PIPE STANDS A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated ass mblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Low-Type, Single or Multiple-Pipe Stand: One-piece recycled rubber b se unit, for roof installation without membrane penetration. C. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. . 2. Base: recycled rubber with load distribution plate. • 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous- thread rods. . 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with pipe clamp-type pipe support. D. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for w roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Bases: recycled rubber with load distribution plate. ! 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. i 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers. E. Where required by piping system type as identified in Section 3 below proN ide electro plated cast iron pipe roller with the pipe stand. i 2.7 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applicati ns. 2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon- steel shapes. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-ceme it, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-4 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT • 220529- 5 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. • 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. w D. Fastener System Installation shall be a one or both of the following as allowed by the structural 0 drawings and specifications: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use . operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Pipe Stand Installation: w 1. Pipe Stand Types: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. ® F. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste w piping connections to each plumbing fixture. 0 G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, • washers, and other accessories. H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. • I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Where applicable M install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. For existing or precast concrete slabs attachments shall be made using concrete anchors. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529- 5 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING ND EQUIPMENT 220529 -6 L. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flan es, and strainers, . NIPS 2-112 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. • M. Support the system without sagging, including supports at each offset r change in pipe direction and at the ends of pipe branches over five feet in length. • N. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. O. Install supports to provide a minimum '% inch clear space between finished covering and . adjacent work. P. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead oads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Q. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services pipin j. R. Insulated Piping: • 1. On all piping points of support install thermal-hanger shields and inserts with insulation • insert the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. . 2. For piping operating below Ambient Air Temperature the vapor barer jacket shall be i sealed tight to adjoining insulation to provide a neat and complete vapor tight installation. 3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Shall be as indicated by the manufacturer but not less than the following: • a. NPS 1/4 to NIPS 3-112: 6 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. • b. NIPS 4: 6 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 6 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NIPS 14: 12 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NIPS 16 to NPS 24: 12 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 4. When pipe hanger spacing exceeds 10 feet utilize a double layer the al-hangar shield. 5. For all piping with roller supports utilize a thermal-hangar shield with in art that includes a • wear/weight distribution plate of carbon steel that has been primer pai ted. w 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure over ead or to support • equipment above floor. • B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connect ons that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. • HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-6 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT w 220529-7 C. Field Welding: Comply with AWSD1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; w appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. • 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where non-copper attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environments where noted below: A 1. Pool equipment rooms 2. Pool rooms or natatoriums G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 -7 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING ND EQUIPMENT 220529- 8 A 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension f noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 2 to NIPS 5. 2. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspensi n of noninsulated, stationary pipes NIPS 1/2 to NIPS 8. 3. Clips (MSS Type26): For support of insulated pipes not subjec to expansion or contraction. 4. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pi es NPS 2-1/2 to NIPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansi n and contraction might occur. For high temperature applications, 225°F and above, rovide adjustable roller hangers on all piping supports. K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specifie in piping system . Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NIPS 314 to NIPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of ipe risers NIPS 314 to NIPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specifi d in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for h avy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installatio s. • 3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods various types of building attachments. • 4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specifie in piping system . Sections, install the following types: 0 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper atta hment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installa ions with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of botto n flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottorr of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. + 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. �I 6. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for susp anding from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: . a. Light(MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 7. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden be ms. 8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility a beam is required. 9. a. Wall Supports:NPS 1/2 through 3: Offset or straight steel hook b. NIPS 4 and above: Welded steel bracket or metal framing s stem with hangars and supports as noted elsewhere. N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applia tions that are not specified in piping system Sections. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529- 8 f 40 0 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 9 O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 0 Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION 220529 • r 0 w • • 0 • • • 0 0 w 1 • 0 w • r • 0 0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220629-9 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL w 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ® Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY w A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. w 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags. w 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. . B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed i content for each label. C. Valve numbering scheme. D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION w A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. w B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS w 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than w 2-1/2 by 314 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering w ® IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING ND EQUIPMENT 220553 -2 . for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds t three-fourths the size of principal lettering. • 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. w C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, 0 8-112-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where • equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. M 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-c ed, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adh sive backing. • C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using sam designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, an arrow indicating flow direction and any special instructions noted in Part 3 of this specification. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to z ccommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow directi n. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 incheshigh. 2.3 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-1l-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. • 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and • encapsulants. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553-2 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT . 220553- 3 • 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment Including but not limited to the following: 1. Controls: Label magnetic starters and relays to identify connecting or controlled equipment. Label manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches and thermal • overload switched which have not been specified as furnished with indexed faceplates as w to "connected" or "controlled" equipment. Label automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, switches, relays and starters. 2. Pumps: All pumps shall be identified as to service and zone(s)served. • 3. Water Heaters and Boilers: All water heaters shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. 4. Thermostatic Valves: Shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. 5. Water Meters: Shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. • 6. Backflow Prevention Devices: Shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; • machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. • 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. • 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 30 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 20 feet in • areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 8. For overhead piping, apply label on the lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed so marking can be read from floor level. • B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: a. Background Color: Blue. b. Letter Color: White. 2. Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: a. Background Color. Blue. • b. Letter Color: White. 3. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. • IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553- 3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING NO EQUIPMENT • 220553-4 • C. Special Identification: For domestic hot water or tempered w ter the pipe label • shall also identify the fluid temperature. 4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: • a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. 3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except the k valves; faucets; • convenience hose connections and lawn-watering hose connections; and imilar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve sche ule. 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: • a. Cold Water: 1-112 inches, round. • b. Hot Water: 1-112 inches, round. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-112 inches, round. • d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-112 inches, round. • 2. Valve-Tag Color: • a. Cold Water: Natural. • b. Hot Water: Natural. C. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Natural. d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: Natural. • • END OF SECTION 220553 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553-4 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION . 220719 - 1 A SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: • 1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions. 5. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks. B. Related Sections. 1. Section 220716 'Plumbing Equipment Insulation" 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory-and field-applied, if any). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE M A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. • C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 1 r • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPI G INSULATION • 220719-2 . 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation sh elds specified in . Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation a plication. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirem nts for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for aintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, wh re required, after • installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on s gments that have satisfactory test results. • B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possi le in each area of • construction. • PART 2 -PRODUCTS • • 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS • A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indo r Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping insulation Schedule," and "Out oor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be ap lied. • B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less • than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be quell ied as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber aterials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. . 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of th following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.: Aerocel. • b. Armacell LLC: AP Armaflex • C. K-Flex USA Insul-Lock Insul-Tube and K-FLEX LS. • F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: • 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of th following: • a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.: Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville: Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation: 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. , d. Manson Insulation Inc.: Alley-K. e. Owens Corning: Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-2 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION . 220719-3 • 2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"Article. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. w 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.: Super-Stik. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. !•► 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA. Inc.: Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC: Armaflex 520 Adhesive. C. Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc. a business of H. B. Fuller Company: 85-75. + d. K-Flex USA R-373 Contact Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands. Inc.. a business of H. B. Fuller Company CP-127. • b. Eagle Bridges- Marathon Industries: 225. C. Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc. a business of H. B. Fuller Company' 85-60/85-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.: 22-25. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSKJacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc. a business of H. B. Fuller Company: CP-82. b. Eagle Bridges- Marathon Industries: 225. C. Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands. Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller . Company: 85-20. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 -3 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIP NG INSULATION 220719-4 • d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.: 22-25. . 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when • calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. • 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of th following: a. Dow Corning Corporation 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns Manville Zeston Perma-Weld CEEL-TITE Solvent Weldi ia Adhesive. C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. i d. Speedline Corporation; Polvco VP Adhesive. . 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 5 g/L or less when • calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 MASTICS . A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and subs rates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 5 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambie t services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available pro ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a. Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc. a busin ss of H. B. Fuller Company: 30-80/30-90. b. Vimasco Corporation: 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 pe m at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. • 5. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of th following: a. Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc. a bust ess of H. B. Fuller Company: CP-76. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries: 405. C. Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc. a busin ss of H. B. Fuller Company: 95-44. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.: 44-05. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and s bstrates. 3. Fire-and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. . PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-4 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 5 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands. Inc.. a business of H. B. Fuller ® Company: CP-76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. • 3. Fire-and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White, 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS w A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type 1. 2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type 11. 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. • B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: • a. Johns Manville: Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.: FG Series. C. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speeding Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system.. w 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. C. Metal Jacket: PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-5 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION • 220719-6 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: w a. Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc. a business of H. B. Fuller Company' Metal Jacketing Systems. b. TW Insulation Systems Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, • Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing . • b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedul s. w C. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-b ded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: . 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short. and long-radius w elbows. 3) Tee covers. w 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. . 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitt ng covers are not available. 2.8 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, • complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ABI. Ideal Tape Division 428 AWF ASJ. • b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tap es Division Fasson 836. C. Compac Corporation: 104 and 105. d. Venture Tae 1540 CW Plus 1542 CW Plus and 1542 CW Plu /SQ. • 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. • 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. • 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket wil h acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. • 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of th following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division: 491 AWF FSK. w b. AverV Dennison Corporation, Specialty Ta es Division Fasson 827. C. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. w d. Venture Tape 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW. and 1528 CW/SQ. • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-6 w • • w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-7 • 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ABI Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape. w b. Compac Corporation: 130. C. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf/inch in width. 2.9 SECUREMENTS A. Bands. • 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: r a. ITW Insulation Systems: Gerrard Strapping and Seals. w b. RPR Products, Inc.: Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 314-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel. 2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Engineered Brass Company. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.: a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. C. McGuire Manufacturing. d. Plumberex. e. Truebro: a brand of IPS Corporation. f. Zurn Industries, LLC: Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-7 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 -8 w 2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold- . water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for ins Ilation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of de ects. • 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. w B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been come tied. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. ReMOVE materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: . 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. • Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and a plication methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracin 3. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are t be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. . 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; • free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and SpE cialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable forte service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggere . r PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-8 i • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION • 220719- 9 • F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with -+ adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over • jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet • and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps • with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. • 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and • at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. • M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking • due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: • 1. Vibration-control devices. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 -9 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIP NG INSULATION 220719- 10 A 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. . 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuo sly through roof penetrations. • 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. . 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation bove roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and utdoor insulation, w install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor ins lation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 i ches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. • B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Termin to insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install ins lation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor ins lation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. • 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap all flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. • D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Ar Not Fire Rated): • Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation • continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. • 1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 'Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping • and fire-resistive joint sealers. • F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: • 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply wit i requirements in Section 078413"Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material install tion articles. w B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: • • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 10 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION • 220719- 11 • 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same • material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. • 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same • material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with • adhesive. • 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe • insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe • diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. • 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe • insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating • cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and • replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor • barrier. • 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe • insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. • 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the • mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation • facing using PVC tape. • 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. • C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape • Insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating • cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. • D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the • following: • 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same • thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. • 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation • from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except • divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 11 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIP NG INSULATION • 220719- 12 • 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of • mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe • insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulati ig cement applied • in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a s nooth finish. • 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedul s, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. • 16 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended ac hesive to eliminate • openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. • B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: • 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. • 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and t olts, plus twice the • thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and out r circumference of • adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness • as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's reco mended adhesive • to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface eing insulated. • C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: • 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. • 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's reco mended adhesive • to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface eing insulated. • D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: • 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when • available. • 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut section of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to p cking and to allow • valve operation without disturbing insulation. • 1 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation applicatio . 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams ith manufacturer's • recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that alto passage of air to • surface being insulated. • 3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION • A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: • 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire of bands and tighten • bands without deforming insulation materials. • 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joil ts, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. • 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfac s, secure laps with • outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. • • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 12 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 13 • 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by • insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. • B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: • • 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the • thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of • adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. • 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at • least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. • C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: • 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when • available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections • of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation • materials with wire or bands. • D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: • 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when • available. • 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. • 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. • 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION • A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end • joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. • 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the • finish bead along seam and joint edge. • B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof • sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 • inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.9 FINISHES • A. Piping exposed in mechanical rooms (i.e. fan rooms, boiler room, chiller room, etc...) that is not • required to have a PVC jacket shall have the insulation ASJ or other Paintable Jacket material • painted to match Color Coding by system type. • 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material • and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. • a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 13 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 14 • B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of • insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. • 3.10 COLOR CODING • A. Where jackets are to be colored or painted by system type the following color shall apply: 1. Domestic Cold Water and Non-potable Water White • 2. Domestic Hot Water Pink • 3. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Purpl • B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on t e following: • 1. Underground piping • 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personn I injury. 3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE • • A. All piping insulation shall comply with the type and insulation thickness noted in the schedule • below and as noted elsewhere. • PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE ' Piping System Insulation Type Fluid < V 1"to 1- 1-1/2" 4"to 6"' 8" Types Temperature 114" t 3" and Range larger Domestic Cold Flexible 35 to 65 Deg F 1/2" 1/2"" 1' 1" 1" Water Elastomeric or Mineral-Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation wNVicking System Domestic Hot Flexible 105 to 160 Deg 1" 1" 1 1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" Water Elastomeric or F Mineral-Fiber Domestic Hot Preformed Pipe Water Recirculation Insulation 161 to 200 Deg 1-112" 1-1/2" 2" 2" F Storm Water and Flexible 35 to 65 Deg F 1/2" 1/2"" 1" 1" 1" Overflow Elastomeric or Mineral-Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation wA(Vicking System Condensate and Flexible < 60 Deg F 1/2" 1" 1" 1" 1-1/2" PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 14 • • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION • 220719 - 15 • PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE' • Piping System Insulation Type Fluid < 1" 1"to 1- 1-112" 4"to 8" 8" Types Temperature 1/4" to 3" and • Range larger • Equipment Drain Elastomericor • Water Mineral-Fiber Preformed Pipe • Insulation • Notes: 1 -For piping exposed to the outside ambient conditions, increase thickness of insulation by • 112". • 2- B. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: • • 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. • b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type l: 1 inch thick. • C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing • Fixtures: • 1. Provide protection shielding guard. D. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: • 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: • a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type l: 1-1/2 inches thick. • 3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE • A. Install jacket over Insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field- applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. • B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. = C. Piping, Concealed: • 1. None. • D. Piping, Exposed: • 1. General Areas: PVC, color shall be as selected by Architect. 2. Mechanical Rooms (i.e. fan rooms, boiler rooms, chiller rooms, etc...): PVC, Color- Coded by System: 30 mils thick. • 3.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE • • A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field- applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719- 15 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING • 221116- 1 • SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • • A. Section Includes: • 1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside • buildings. 2. Encasement for piping. • • 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS • • A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. • • 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. System purging and disinfecting activities report. B. Field quality-control reports. • 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to • provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: • 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water • service. • 2. Do not interrupt water service without Architect's written permission. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • • 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS • • A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. • • • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-2 • B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 131. Plastic piping • components shall be marked with"NSF-pw." • C. All fittings shall be Lead Free (ASTM listed) and shall be made with corrosion-resistant • materials. Manufacturer shall provide upon request third party certification tested in accordance with EN ISO 6509 regarding dezincification corrosion resistance and stress corrosion cracking. • • 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS • A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. • • B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper. • C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME 816.22, wrought-copper press ire fittings. D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends. • E. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. • 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. • 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends. • F. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the • following: • a. Elkhart Products Corporation. • b. NIBCO Inc. • C. Viega. . 2. Fittings for NIPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-ru ber, O-ring seal in each end. • 3. Fittings for NIPS 2-112 to NIPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM- rubber, O-ring seal in each end. • G. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the following: a. T-Drill Industries Inc. 2. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. • H. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the following: • a. Anvil International. b. Shurjoint Piping Products. • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-2 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-3 . C. Victaulic Company. 2. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings. 3. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: • a. Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. b. Ferrous housing sections. • C. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. • d. Bolts and nuts. e. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig. • • 2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: • 1. AMA C 151/A21.51. • 2. Pipe shall conform to AWWA C104 when required by the water utility. • 3. Push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. • B. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: a. Shurjoint Piping Products. • b. Star Pipe Products. • C. Victaulic Company. 2. Fittings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings • or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions that match pipe. 3. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping: • a. AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. • b. Ferrous housing sections. • C. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. • d. Bolts and nuts. e. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1) NIPS 4 to NPS 18: 250 psig. • 2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL PIPING • • A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61. • B. Stainless-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Schedule 10. C. Stainless-Steel Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 815/A 815M. • • D. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Stainless-Steel Pipe: • • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116- 3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX . DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-4 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: • a. Anvil International. • b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP. C. Shurjoint Piping Products. • d. Victaulic Company. • 2. Fittings for Grooved-End, Stainless-Steel Pipe: Stainless-steel casting with dimensions • matching stainless-steel pipe. • 3. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End, Stainless-Steel Pipe: a. AMA C606 for stainless-steel-pipe dimensions. b. Stainless-steel housing sections. C. Stainless-steel bolts and nuts. • d. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. e. Minimum Pressure Rating: • 1) NIPS 8 and Smaller: 600 psig. • • 2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS • • A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: • 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and • asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. • 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. • B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. • D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. • • E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- • duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. • 2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING • • A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5. • B. Form: tube. • C. Color: Black or natural • • 2.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS • A. General Requirements: • 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. • 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -4 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING • 221116-5 • 2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS • A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. • B. Dielectric Nipples and Couplings: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: • a. Elster Perfection Corporation. • b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP. C. Matco-Norca. • d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. . e. Victaulic Company. • 2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. • 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. • 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. • 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. • • PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 EARTHWORK • A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and • backfilling. • • 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of • domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated • unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. • B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWAC600 and AWWA M41. • D. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to • ASTM A 674 or AMA C1 05/A21.5. E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve • inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping • Specialties." • • • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-6 • F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves if required downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with • requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. • • H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according tc utility company's . requirements. I. Install seismic restraints on piping if required. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and • Equipment."Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building • occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and se ice areas at right • angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. • K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. • L. Install piping to permit valve servicing. • M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher • than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. • N. Install piping free of sags and bends. • O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. • P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and • specialty. • Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing Pump and packaged • booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and • Gages for Plumbing Piping." • R. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." • S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements • for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plum ing Piping." • T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and sla s. Comply with • requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." • U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floo s. Comply with • requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518"Escutcheons for F lumbing Piping." • • 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION • A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel p ipe. • • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -6 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING • 221116 -7 • B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. • C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore • full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: • 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or • damaged. • D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," 'Brazed Joints"chapter. • E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. • Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDKs"Copper Tube Handbook." • F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with • tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. • G. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, • and braze branch tube into collar. • H. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. • I. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. • Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified • (flexible or rigid)joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten • housing bolts. J. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and • thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to • ASME 831.9. • K. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of . both piping systems. • • 3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION • A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. • • 3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. • • B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples. • C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric nipples. • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7 • A • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-8 • D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION • A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 2205 48 'Vibration and • Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • S. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. • 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 feet and less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hanger . • b. Longer Than 100 feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. • C. Longer Than 100 feet if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushior rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 feet or longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. • E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum • rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 318-inch rod. • 2. NPS 1 and NIPS 1-114: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 112-inch rod. • 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. • 7. NIPS 8: 10 feet with 314-inch rod. • F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. • G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 nd manufacturer's • written instructions. • 3.7 CONNECTIONS • A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. • B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and ; maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. • D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, ext nd and connect to the following: • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116- 8 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING • 221116 -9 1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not • smaller than sizes of water heater connections. ! 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code. ! 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use • flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-112 and larger. E. Water Utility Connection: Comply with the utility company's requirements. Where differences occur between these specifications and the utility company's requirements, comply with the utility company's requirements to allow for their approval. Notify Project Manager of any and all changes for Engineer's review. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION • A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. • 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Perform the following tests and inspections: ! 1. Piping Inspections: • a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. ! b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities • having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance • with requirements. • C. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. • d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. ! • 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air • bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been • altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. • • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-9 ! w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX . DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116- 10 C. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and • unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate w test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof w until satisfactory results are obtained. • f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. • B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests an inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. w w 3.10 ADJUSTING w A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. , 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch. - b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary seali g of piping during • installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. . 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges a as specified for • application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. . • 3.11 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: w 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered. extended, or repaired before using. w 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if • methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWAC651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: . 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution wi h at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 h Durs. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. w DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 10 • w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK 8, RECORDER ANNEX ! DOMESTIC WATER PIPING . 221116 - 11 C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. ! e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows: ! 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or • repaired before using. 2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are ! not prescribed, follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. ! b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. ! C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water- sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. ! 3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE ! A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used • in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. ! C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NIPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following unless specifically indicated otherwise by the water utility: ! 1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder joint fittings; and brazed joints. ! E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NIPS 3 to NIPS 8 and larger, shall be one of the following unless specifically indicated otherwise by the water utility: 1. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact-pattern, push-on-joint fittings; and ! gasketed joints. F. Under-building-slab, combined domestic water, building-service, and fire-service-main piping, ! NIPS 6 to NIPS 12 , shall be one of the following unless specifically indicated otherwise by the • water utility: 1. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact-pattern, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints. ! G. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NIPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: • 1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and ! brazed joints. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116- 11 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116- 12 w H. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the llowing: . 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder joint fitt ngs; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure- sealed joints. I. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. . 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings, and pressure- sealed joints. 3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; grooved-joint, copper-tube a purtenances; and grooved joints. J. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be one of the foll wing: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fi ings; and brazed • joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ; grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints. • 3. Stainless-steel Schedule 10 pipe, grooved joint fittings, and grooved joints. 3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the • following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NIPS 2 and smaller. Use butternyor ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball • valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. . 3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. • B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and f om equipment. C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping. , END OF SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116- 12 . • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1 SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: 1. Backflow preventers. . 2. Water pressure-reducing valves. 3. Balancing valves. 4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Outlet boxes. 7. Hose bibbs. 8. Wall hydrants. 9. Drain valves. 10. Water-hammer arresters. . 11. Trap-seal primer valves. 12. Flexible connectors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure . gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping. 2. Section 221116"Domestic Water Piping"for water meters. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lead Free: Refers to the wetted surface of pipe, fittings and fixtures in potable water systems that have a weighted average lead content 50.25% per Safe Drinking Water Act. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119- 1 • w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • DOMESTIC WATER PIP114G SPECIALTIES 221119 -2 w PART 2- PRODUCTS • • 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES • A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61. B. Lead free components shall comply with NSF/ANSI-372. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS w A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psi unless otherwise indicated. w w 2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS w A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers BFP-1: - 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: w a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. C. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regu ator Company. . d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. • 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining hat complies with • AWWAC550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. w 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal straight-through, vertical-inle horizontal-center- section with vertical-outlet or vertical flow as identified on the drawings. 8. All components shall be certified"Lead-Free" 9. Accessories: a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inle and outlet. • b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged w ends on inlet and outlet. w C. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME Al 12.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection. 10. See Drawing Schedule for Capacities and Characteristics. w 2.4 BALANCING VALVES w A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the , following: • a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Flo Fab Inc. C. ITT Corporation; Bell &Gossett Div. w w DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -2 w w . JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-3 d. NIBCO Inc. e. TAC. f. TACO Incorporated. w g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. 2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator. 3. Body: bronze with lead-free construction for potable water. 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2. 5. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" 6. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. 2.5 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES w w A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves WMV-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product w indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bradley w b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Honeywell International Inc. e. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. . f. Leonard Valve Company. g. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1070, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. w 4. Body: Lead Free Brass body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. w 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze. 8. All components shall be certified"Lead-Free" 9. Tempered-Water Setting: 105 deg F. 10. Tempered-Water Design Flow Range: 0.35 gpm to 1.5 gpm. w 2.6 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers : w . 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. • 4. All components shall be certified"Lead-Free" 5. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 6. Perforation Size: w a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.062 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.062 inch. w DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-3 w w • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-4 C. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.125 inch. • 7. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve. • • 2.7 OUTLET BOXES • A. Icemaker/Coffee Machine Outlet Boxes IM-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • a. Acorn Engineering Company. ' b. IPS Corporation. • C. LSP Products Group, Inc. d. Oatey. e. Plastic Oddities. I. Sioux Chief • 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Plastic box and faceplate. Provide fire-rated encl sure if installed in rated assembly. , 4. Faucet: Ball valve shutoff fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. P ovide ASSE 1010 certified water hammer arrester. All components shall be certified "Lead-Free" • 2.8 WALL HYDRANTS • A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants WHA. • 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirement , provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. • C. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Wafts Drainage Products. • g. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industrie , Inc. • h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commerc al Products. • i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification D ainage Products. 2. Standard: ASME All 12.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. Provide • hot and cold water connections where noted on plans. Provide frost proof construction • where noted on plans. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thick ess. Include wall . clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1. 7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with ASME 81.20.7. • 8. Box: Where indicated on plans provide a deep bos, flush mounted wit cover. • 9. Box and Cover Finish: Chrome plated. 10. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thr ad complying with • ASME B1.20.7. • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-4 , • • w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-5 11. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant, minimum of two for the project. 2.9 DRAIN VALVES ! A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SPA 10 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NIPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solderjoint. • 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.10 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device TP-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. • b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts; a division of Wafts Water Technologies, Inc.; Wafts Regulator Company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solderjoint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not • chrome finished. 2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: t] 1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex Pression, Ltd. 4. Flex-Weld Incorporated. 5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 6. Mercer Gasket&Shim, Inc. 7. Metraflex, Inc. 8. Proco Products, Inc. 9. TOZEN Corporation. 10. Unaflex.Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company. w DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 5 w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPI G SPECIALTIES 221119 -6 B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubi g with stainless- • steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. All component shall be certified "Lead-Free" 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. • 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. • 3. End Connections NPS 2-112 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. . PART 3- EXECUTION • • 3.1 INSTALLATION • A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment aid systems and to • other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with • authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. i 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe • diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain or to an alternate locat on as identified on the drawings. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow pr venter. Simple air • breaks are unacceptable for this application. . 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves for each water regulator. Provide a • water regulator bypass with a calibrated balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet of water regulator or water regulator station. Install blow down valve on each water • regulator strainer. Install pressure relief valve set at 100 psig on house sic of water regulator or water regulator station, pipe pressure relief valve to nearest floor drain. • C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. . D. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets • and with shutoff valve on outlet. • E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure- educing valve and . pump. F. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-trea ed-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-reta ant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000"Rough Carpentry." • G. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. Provide access door. H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down ward drain trap a . minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fittin . Adjust valve for proper flow. Provide access door. I. When soldering use paste flux that are approved by the manufacturer for se with Lead Free Alloys. • • • DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-6 • w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 7 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for • Electrical Systems." 3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Reduced-pressure-principle backfiow preventers. 2. Water pressure-reducing valves. 3. Thermostatic, water mixing valves. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backfiow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and ® inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service on all primary type thermostatic mixing valves. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain all thermostatic mixing valves. END OF SECTION 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-7 w A JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING w 221316 - 1 SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING w PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary . Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping. w ® B. Related Sections: 1. Section 333000 "Sanitary Utility Sewerage" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures outside the building five feet or more. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: w 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 2. Waste, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. w B. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. w 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. w SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316- 1 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& REC ORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE A14D VENT PIPING 221316 -2 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then onh,after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Architect's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pip a sizes. • 2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es). B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME 816.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings. C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide proc ucts by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. • b. Dallas Specialty& Mfg. Co. C. Femco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. . 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel ba ds and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop` SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-2 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-3 • 2.4 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight class. Include threaded • ends matching joining method. B. Galvanized-Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings: ASME 816.12, threaded. C. Steel Pipe Pressure Fittings: 1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. i 2.5 Galvanized-Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME 816.4, Class 125, standard pattern.DUCTILE- IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-Joint Piping: 1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWAC151/A21.51 with round-cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606. 2. Ductile-Iron-Pipe Appurtenances: . a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Anvil International. 2) Shurjoint Piping Products. 3) Star Pipe Products. 4) Victaulic Company. b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching AWWA C1 10/A 21.10 ductile-iron pipe or AWWA C153/A 21.53 ductile-iron fittings and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends. C. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber • center-leg gasket suitable for hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts. 2.6 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Pressure Fittings: 1. Copper Fittings: ASME 816.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME 816.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. C. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316- 3 w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-4 2.7 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. w w C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns . and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. • D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. • 1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according • to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated w according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). i w 2.8 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS • A. Transition Couplings: w 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as a d compatible with pipes to be joined. • 2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. B. Dielectric Fittings: w 1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Dielectric Nipples: w a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provic a products by one w of the following: 1) Elster Perfection. + 2) Grinnell Mechanical Products. 3) Matco-Norca, Inc. • 4) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 5) Victaulic Company. w b. Description: • 1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66 w 2) Electroplated steel nipple. 3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. . 5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. • SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-4 w w w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING w 221316- 5 • 2.9 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5. • B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch or high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness. C. Form: tube. D. Color: Black or natural. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 • "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION • A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated • unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. • B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. • C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Install seismic restraints on piping when required. Comply with requirements for seismic- restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." I. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate • branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be • used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 118-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 -5 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-6 • J. Drain lines shall not be less than 2 inches when located below slab on grade f oor. K. Exterior vent terminations shall be increased to a minimum of 3 inches 1 fool below the roof or inside of the wall prior to the termination for frost protection. Roof vent terminations shall be . atleast 2 feet from the roof edge, parapet or wall line. L. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, • cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. M. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimL m slopes unless • otherwise indicated: 1. Sanitary Drain: 2 percent (1/4 inch per foot) downward in direction of flow for piping • NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent(1 18 inch per foot) downward in directio 1 of flow for piping w NPS 4 and larger. S 2. Vent Piping: 1 percent(1/8 inch per foot) down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fttings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AW WA C 105/A 21.5. . O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code. P. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's"Copper Tube Handbook." Q. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. R. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows: w 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities ha ing jurisdiction. 2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions. S. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C6 0. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer • piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. 1. For corrosive soil environment install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AW WA C 105/A 21.5. T. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Ti be Handbook." U. Install force mains at elevations indicated. V. Plumbing Specialties: . 1. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 22131 "Sanitary Waste . Piping Specialties." SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 -6 • 41 0 i • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING • 221316-7 . 2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319"Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." W. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. • X. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517"Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Y. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for w Plumbing Piping." Z. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." • 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for compression joints. B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for hubless-piping coupling joints. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 61.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or . damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. . D. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, ® water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder. E. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWAC606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. F. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: • 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. . 2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. • 3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE A D VENT PIPING • 221316- 8 • 3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings. • 4. In Underground Force Main Piping: • a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings. • b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings. B. Dielectric Fittings: • 1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal pipir g and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples . • 3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric nipples. • 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION • A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Section 220523 "G neral-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Shutoff Valves: 1. Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge. 2. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. • C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge. • 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION • A. When required comply with requirements for seismic-restraint dev ces specified in • Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and insta lation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorros ve environments. 3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. • 4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. • b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers • C. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushio 1 rolls. • 5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS ype 44, pipe rolls. • Support pipe rolls on trapeze. . 6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. • C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. • E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. • • • SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-8 • • w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING . 221316- 9 F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: w 1. NPS 1-112 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 318-inch rod. w 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 518-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. w 5. NPS 10 and NIPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod . diameters: 1. NIPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. • 2. NIPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-112: 11 feet with 112-inch rod. 5. NIPS 3: 12 feet with 112-inch rod. 6. NIPS 4 and NIPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. • 7. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 12 feet with 314-inch rod. 8. NIPS 10 and NPS 12: 12 feetwith 7/8-inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum • rod diameters: 1. NIPS 1-114: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NIPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 318-inch rod. 3. NIPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 112-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NIPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 314-inch rod. K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. L. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NIPS 1-1/2 and NIPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NIPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NIPS 4 and NIPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NIPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 314-inch rod. . 5. NPS 10 and NIPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. • M. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written w instructions. w w SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316- 9 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE A14D VENT PIPING 221316 - 10 3.7 CONNECTIONS • A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. • B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. Provide an approved two-way type grade cleanou at the connection between the building sanitary drain and the exterior sanitary sewerage piping. • C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: . 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, buil not smaller than • required by plumbing code. • 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes ndicated, but not • smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cl anouts with cover • flush with floor. . 5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Sectio 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." • 6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff val a if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connecti ns NIPS 2-1/2 and larger. D. Connect force-main piping to the following: • 1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main. • 2. Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge. E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service an maintenance of • equipment. • • 3.8 IDENTIFICATION • A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in • after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. • 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe . tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. • B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, • make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. • C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities hav ng jurisdiction. • • • SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 10 • • • w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 11 D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: w 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate . report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside w leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for w leaks. • 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping • system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. w 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until . satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. . E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: • 1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed w before it was tested. 2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 20 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. • 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. w C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. w 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. This pipe schedule applies to pipe materials used within and under the building to a distance of w five feet from the building edge. Refer to Division 33 for specification on piping beyond five feet from the building edge. w w SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 11 w • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE A D VENT PIPING 221316 - 12 • B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless oth rwise indicated. C. Sovent stack fittings shall only be used where identified on the drawings. D. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the fol owing: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joi ts. • 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; CI PI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition c uplings. E. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the foil ing: . 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joi ts. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; Cl PI hubless-piping • couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition c uplings. F. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: • 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joi its. . 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping coup ings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition c uplings. G. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joi its. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping coup ings; and coupled joints. . 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. H. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of he following: • 1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI cast-iron hubless-pi ing couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid wall or Cellular-core PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- emented joints. • 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition ouplings. I. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the foil wing: • 1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI cast-iron hubles -piping couplings; coupled joints. 3. Solid-wall or Cellular-core PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent- emented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition ouplings. . J. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 1-112 to NPS 6 shall be an of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joint . 2. Galvanized-steel pipe and threaded joints. K. Underground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS2 and larger shall be any oft ie following: SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 12 • • M • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING • 221316- 13 1. Hard copper tube, Type L, wrought-copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Ductile-iron, grooved-joint piping and grooved joints. 3. Fitting-type transition coupling for piping smaller than NIPS 1-112 and pressure transition • coupling for NIPS 1-112 and larger if dissimilar pipe materials. 0 END OF SECTION 221316 • • • • w ! • • • y • • • • • • • ! • • • • • • • ! ! • • • SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 13 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES . 221319 - 1 SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS w A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts, 2. Floor drains. 3. Roof flashing assemblies. 4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. ® 5. Flashing materials. 6. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for storm drainage piping inside the building, drainage piping specialties, and drains. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. HOPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. B. PE: Polyethylene plastic. . C. PP: Polypropylene plastic. D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX • SANITARY WASTE PIPI G SPECIALTIES 221319-2 • B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," or plastic sanitary • piping specialty components. • 1.7 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 0330 0 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations. • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • • 2.1 • • 2.2 CLEANOUTS • A. Metal Floor Cleanouts: w 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. • b. Oatey. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. • e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f, Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. • h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operati n. • 2. Standard: ASME All 12.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleano t. • 3. Size: Same as connected branch. • 4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. • 6. Clamping Device: As required. 7. Outlet Connection: Same as connected branch. • 8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. , 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads . 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Scored nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round or Square to best match adjacent finished surfaces.. • Provide with carpet flange for carpeted areas for flush installation. 12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty for standard installation to Lions. Heavy Duty • for installations in: loading docks, maintenance bays, parking g rages, mechanical • rooms and any other spaces receiving vehicular or fork lift traffic. 13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and ri er to cleanout. • B. Cast-Iron Wall or Exposed Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the following: • a. Josam Company; Josam Div. • SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-2 w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES • 221319- 3 • b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; d of Smith Industries, Inc. . e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group, Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee w as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. ® 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. • w 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains and Equipment Room Drains: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product . indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. w d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. w g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Cast iron. 5. Seepage Flange: As required by adjacent surfaces. 6. Anchor Flange: As required by adjacent surfaces. 7. Clamping Device: As required by adjacent surfaces. 8. Outlet: Bottom. w 9. Secondary Strainer: Provide a secondary strainer or sediment bucket on the equipment room drains. w 10. Top or Strainer Material: Heel Proof Nickel bronze . 11. Top Shape: Round or Square to best match adjacent finished surfaces.. 12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty for standard installation locations. Heavy Duty for installations in: loading docks, maintenance bays, parking garages, mechanical rooms and any other spaces receiving vehicular or fork lift traffic. 13. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap. w 14. Trap Features: Provide trap-seal primer valve drain connection where trap primer is indicated on plans.. 15. See Drawing Schedule for information on accessories, loading classification and other characteristics. w 2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: • • r SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319- 3 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE PIPI G SPECIALTIES w 221319-4 • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the • following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- tick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel oot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. i 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES M A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings: • 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot o itlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NIPS 1/2 side inlet. B. Air-Gap Fittings: • 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positi a air gap between • installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large eno gh for associated indirect waste piping. 2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS • A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the followin minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: • 1. General Use: 4.0-Iblsq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness. B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/6 152M, of the following minimum weight and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: • 1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft.. C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethyle e, 40-mil minimum thickness. D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and si ilar accessory units • required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. • G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-4 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-5 • PART 3-EXECUTION . 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: Install oil and solids interceptors on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete." • 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. • 2. Construct bases to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by . code. 3. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high and extend base not less than 6 inches in all • directions beyond the maximum dimensions of oil and solids interceptors, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise • indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. • 7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. • B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, ` unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NIPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. r 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NIPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. • • C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. • • D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. Cleanout shall be located 4 to 6 inches above the finished floor unless cleanout would fall behind permanent casework, then locate to 4 • feet 6 inches above the floor. + E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with . finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. • 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1f4- inch total depression. • b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1- • inch total depression. r • SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319- 5 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE PIPI G SPECIALTIES 221319-6 • 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs b tween drain and • adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where p netrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary build ng drain, unless otherwise indicated. • F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that a tend through roof. Increase exterior vent size as specified in Section 221316"Sanitary Waste an Vent Piping." • G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that requir trap-seal primer • connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connecti n. • 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. I. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping • discharge into sanitary drainage system. • J. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through flo rs with waterproof • membrane. • K. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expan ion joints for easy access and maintenance. • L. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. M. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wa tes unless trap is • indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS . A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping • installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of p ping, fittings, and specialties. • B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. • C. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to uni ; flow-control fitting r and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil stor ge tank. . 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION . A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other d ainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: • 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch t ickness or thicker. • Solderjoints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thin er. • 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. • B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. r • SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-6 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK i£RECORDER ANNEX SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319- 7 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. • 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around • sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made roof • flashing assembly, according to Section 076200"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." • F. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. • 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or • sign on or near each of the following: 1. Oil interceptors. 2. Solids interceptors. • • 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and • to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. + B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. 4 END OF SECTION 221319 • • • • • i • A • 4 • • i • SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-7 r • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS • 223400- 1 • SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS • • PART 1 - GENERAL • • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • • 1.2 SUMMARY • • A. Section Includes: 1. Gas-fired, tankless, domestic-water heaters. • 2. Domestic-water heater accessories. • 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated • capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and • accessories. • B. LEED Submittals: • 1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with • applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 7, "Service Water Heating." • C. Shop Drawings: 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. • 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • • A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, accessories, and • components, from manufacturer. • 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. • 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate • and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. • B. Product Certificates: For each type of gas-fired, tankless, domestic-water heater, from • manufacturer. C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to • authorities having jurisdiction. • D. Source quality-control reports. • • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK$ RE ORDER ANNEX • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC4 ATER HEATERS 223400 -2 • E. Field quality-control reports. • F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. • • 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heat rs to include in • emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. • • 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as d(fined in NFPA 70, • by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applicatio • B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply • with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. • C. ASME Compliance: 1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic- water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pres ure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. • 2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label com ercial, finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Press re Vessel Code: • Section IV. • D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will a in contact with • potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects." • • 1.7 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment prov ded. • • 1.8 WARRANTY • A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer grees to repair or • replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materi Is or workmanship • within specified warranty period. • 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: • a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. • b. Faulty operation of controls. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyc nd normal use. • 2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. • a. Gas-Fired, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters: • 1) Heat Exchanger: Five years. • 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years. • • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400- 2 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 3 • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 GAS-FIRED, TANKLESS, domestic-WATER HEATERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ban • 2. Bosch Water Heating. 3. Bradford White Corporation. • 4. NORITZ America Corp. 5. Paloma Industries, Inc. 6. Rheem Manufacturing Company: Rheem Water Heating. • 7. Rinnai Corporation. 8. Smith A. O. Water Products Co. a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. 9. State Industries. • 10. Takagi. 11, WaiWela. B. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for gas-fired, instantaneous, domestic-water heaters for indoor application. • C. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity. • 1. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3. Heat Exchanger: Copper tubing. 4. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2. 5. Jacket: Metal, with enameled finish, or plastic. 6. Burner: For use with tankless, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas fuel. 7. Automatic Ignition: Manufacturer's proprietary system for automatic, gas ignition. 8. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. D. Support: Bracket for wall mounting. • 2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES • A. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20)with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads. B. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2. C. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2. • D. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. E. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 1/2-psig (3.5-kPa) pressure rating as required to match gas supply. FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400- 3 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& R CORDER ANNEX • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC- ATER HEATERS 223400-4 F. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically opera t d, on-off automatic • valve. G. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving pacity at least as • great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-wa r heater working- pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into s orage tank. • 1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped. H. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than domestic-wa er heater working- pressure rating. 0 1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 0 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped. • I. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 0 J. Domestic-Water Heater Stands: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated st I stand for floor 49 mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. Provid dimension that will 0 support bottom of domestic-water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) bove the floor. • K. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturers factory-fabrica steel bracket for 0 wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. • 0 2,3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specifi d to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. • B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one alf times pressure rating before shipment. C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass to is and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and • reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requiremen for correcting the Work. • D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install tankless, domestic-w ter heaters on wall • bracket. 1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are acce sible. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, t mplates, diagrams, • instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400-4 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS • 223400-5 • 5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate. • B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, • and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. 1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified • in Section 220523"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." • C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54. - 1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves. • 2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters • without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner. • 3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control. • 4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Section 231123"Facility Natural-Gas Piping." • D. Install oil-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 31. • 1. Install shutoff valves on fuel-oil supply piping to oil-fired water-heater burners without • shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 230523 • "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." • E. Install commercial domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices. Comply with • requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • F. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater • relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward • pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. • G. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping • same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap • onto closest floor drain. • H. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or • over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves • specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." • I. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for • thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." • J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domestic-water heaters. • Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each domestic-water • heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with requirements for valves • specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply with • • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400- 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC- ATER HEATERS 223400 -6 • requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and G ges for Plumbing • Piping." • K. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of domestic-water he ter storage tanks • without integral or fitting-type heat traps. • L. Fill domestic-water heaters with water. • M. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air. • • 3.2 CONNECTIONS • A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 21116 "Domestic • Water Piping." • B. Comply with requirements for fuel-oil piping specified in Section 23111 "Facility Fuel-Oil • Piping." • C. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 231123 "F cility Natural-Gas Piping." • D. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. • E. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allo space for service • and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of dome tic-water heaters. • • 3.3 IDENTIFICATION • A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identifi tion specified in • Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." • • 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Perform tests and inspections. • • 1. Manufacturers Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized servi representative to • inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, includi g connections, and to assist in testing. • 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Rep it leaks and retest • until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, st rt units to confirm • proper operation. • 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and mal unctioning controls and equipment. • B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass to is and inspections. • Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and • reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requiremen s for correcting the Work. • C. Prepare test and inspection reports. • • • FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400-6 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213- 1 SECTION 224213 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS . A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: 1. Lavatories. 2. Sinks. • 3. Disposers 4. Service Basins. 5. Water closets. • 6. Toilet seats. . 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components • and profiles, and finishes for water closets. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: • 1. Product Data for Water Efficiency Credits: Documentation indicating flow and water • consumption requirements. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. Provide and coordinate counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories and sinks. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves, electronic sensors and automatic faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • PLUM ING FIXTURES 224213 -2 1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of a ch type and size • installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of a ch type and size installed. • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • • 2.1 LAVATORIES . A. Lavatory LL='I: Vitreous china,wall mounted, wheelchair. • 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product • indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • a. American Standard America. • b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. C. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. d. Kohler Co. • e. Zurn Industries, LLC: Commercial Brass and Fixtures. 2. Fixture: • • a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. • b. Type: For wall hanging. C. Nominal Size: 20 by 27 inches. • d. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 4-inch centers. • e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. f. Color: White. • g. Mounting Material: Wheelchair lavatory carrier. • 3. Faucet: As identified on drawings and as specified in "Lavatory Faucet " article. 4. Support: ASME A112.6.1 M, Type ll, concealed-arm wheelchair lavato carrier. Include • rectangular, steel uprights. • B. Lavatory Supply Fittings • 1. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water Syst m Components - Health Effects,"for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with p table water. • 2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA 8125.1. 3. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water- • supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange. • 4. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping. • 5. Retain "Wheel handle" option in "Operation" Paragraph below for one-quarter-turn. ball- • type stops. 6. Operation: Loose key. • 7. Risers: • a. NPS 1/2. b. ASME Al 12.18.6, braided-or corrugated-stainless-steel, flexiblf hose riser. • C. Lavatory Waste Fittings • 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. • 2. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-114 offset and straight tailpiece. • 3. Trap: a. Size: NPS 1-1/4. • • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213 -2 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-3 • b. Retain one of two"Material'subparagraphs below. C. Material: Chrome-plated, cast-brass trap with cleanout plug and arm with escutcheon. • D. Lavatory Faucets- Electronic 1. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - • Health Effects,"for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water. 2. Lavatory Faucets: Automatic-type, electronic-sensor-operated, solid-brass valve. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • 1) Chicago Faucets. • 2) Grohe America, Inc. 3) Kohler Co. • 4) Sloan Valve Company. • 5) Speakman Company. 6) Zurn Industries, LLC: Commercial Brass and Fixtures. • b. Standards: ASME All 12.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and • application. d. Trip Mechanism: Battery-powered or hard-wired electronic sensor as indicated on the drawings. Sensor range shall be adjustable. e. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with • supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. • f. Body Type: 4-inch center set. g. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. • h. Finish: Polished chrome plate. • i. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm or as indicated on drawings. j. Temperature Control: Mixing or Non-mixing as identified on drawings. • k. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. • I. Spout: Rigid type. M. Spout Outlet: Spray. • n. Drain: As specified in the"Lavatory Waste Fittings"article. • 2.2 SINKS A. Kitchen/ Break room/ Bar Sinks S_1: Stainless steel, counter mounted. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Standard • b. Elkav Manufacturing Co. C. Just Manufacturing. • d. Kohler Co. • e. Moen, Inc. • 2. Fixture: • a. Standard: ASME Al12.19.3/CSA 845.4 for stainless-steel sinks. • b. Type: Ledge back, openings as required to match accessories. • C. Number of Compartments: As identified on drawings. d. Overall Dimensions: As identified on drawings. • e. Coating: Fully coated underside for sound reduction and condensation control. f. Metal Thickness: 18-gauge. g. Compartment(s): • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213 -4 • 1) Quantity: As identified on drawings. • 2) Dimensions: As identified on drawings. Where handicap ped/elderly access to the sink is required the sink shall comply with ICCIANSI Al 17.1. 3) Drain: NIPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper. Provide outl t for disposer as • identified on drawings. 4) Drain Location: Centered in compartment excep where sink is • handicapped/elderly accessible then comply with IC /ANSI A117.1 by providing drain location near back left or right side of com artment. • 3. Faucet(s): As identified on drawings and as specified in "Sink Faucets' article. a. Number Required: One. • b. Mounting: On ledge. • 4. Supply Fittings: • a. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size. • 1) Operation: Loose key. • 2) Risers: NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose. • 5. Waste Fittings: a. Trap(s): • 1) Size: NIPS 1-1/2. 2) Material: Chrome-plated, cast-brass trap with cleanout plug and arm with • escutcheon. • b. Disposer: As identified on drawings and as specified in "Disposer" article. • 6. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fitting: As identified on drawings, a. Standard: ASSE 1021. b. Description: Device designed to prevent backflow of conta inated liquid into domestic dishwashers. C. Material: Plastic body with chrome-plated-brass cover. • d. Mounting: Deck. • 7. Mounting: On counter with sealant. • B. Sink Faucets: Solid brass. • 1. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - • Health Effects,"for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide product • indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • a. Chicago Faucets. b. Danze. lnc. C. Grohe America. Inc. • d. Kohler Co. e. Sloan Valve Company. • f. Speakman Company. . g. Zurn Industries, LLC: Commercial Brass and Fixtures. 3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA 8125.1. 4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet i llets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. • • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-4 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK F ANN UMBING FIXTURES 224213-5 5. Kitchen Sink Option: Where identified provide a hand spray complying with ASSE 1025. 6. Finish: Polished chrome plate. • 7. Maximum Flow Rate: As identified on drawings. • 8. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle. 9. Backflow-Prevention Device for Hand Spray if provided. 10. Centers: As identified on drawings. 11. Mounting: Deck, concealed. • 12. Handle(s): Lever. • 13. Spout Type: Swing, solid brass. 14. Spout Outlet: Aerator. • 15. Drain: Lift and turn. • C. Disposers GDA: Continuous-feed household, food waste. • 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product • indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Standard America. • b. InSinkErator. C. KitchenAid. d. Maytag. • 2. Standards: ASSE 1008 and UL 430, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. General: Include reset button; wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam- resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder; NIPS 1-1/2 outlet; quick- mounting, stainless-steel sink flange; antisplash guard; and combination cover/stopper. 4. Model: Sound-insulated chamber. . 5. Motor: 115-V ac, 1725 rpm, 3/4 hp with overload protection. 2.3 SERVICE BASINS • A. Mop Service Basins MSB-1: Terrazzo, floor mounted. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. American Standard C. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C., Fiat Products d. Florestone Products Co.. Inc. • • 2. Fixture: a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99, w b. Material: Terrazzo C. Shape and Size: As identified on drawings. • d. Tiling Flange: As required to match adjacent finished surfaces. e. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces not flush to wall. • f. Color: Not applicable. • g. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet. 3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall. 4. Faucet: As identified on drawings and as specified in "Service Basin Faucets" article. • 5. Accessories: • a. Hose, 5 feet with clamp • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-5 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX . PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-6 • b. Mop hanger . C. Removable dome strainer d. Wall splash panels for all adjacent finished surfaces. e. Drain connector. • B. Service Basin Faucets: Manual type, two-lever-handle mixing valve. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product • indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. Chicago Faucets. C. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C., Fiat Products • d. Kohler Co. e. Speakman Company. • f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures. • 2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. • 3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet i lets with supplies . and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink rece tor. Provide with integral service stops. 4. Body Type: Widespread. • 5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 6. Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Maximum Flow Rate: 3.0 gpm. • 8. Handle(s): Lever. 9. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed. 10. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace and bucket hook. 11. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet. • 12. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7. • • 2.4 WATER CLOSETS • A. Water Closets—Tank WC-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide product • indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • a. American Standard America. • b. Crane Plumbing. L.L.C. C. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. • d. Kohler Co. • e. TOTO USA. INC. f. Zum Industries, LLC: Commercial Brass and Fixtures. 2. Bowl: • a. Configuration: Floor Mounted. • b. Standards: ASME At 12.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME At 12.19.5. • C. Material: Vitreous china. d. Type: Siphon. • e. Flushing Mechanism: Pressure Assist or Gravity Tank as identifi d on drawings. f. Outlet: Bottom Outlet. • 9. Height: Standard, Child or Handicapped/elderly, complying with ICC/ANSI A117.1 • as identified on drawings. h. Rim Contour: Elongated. • i. Water Consumption: As identified on drawings. • j. Color: White. • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-6 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK ANNEX PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213 -7 • 3. Toilet Seat: As identified on drawings and as specified in 'Toilet Seats"article below. 4. Supply Fittings: • a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA 8125.1. b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange. C. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-tum, ball-type or compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size. w1) Operation: Loose key. • d. Riser: 1) Size: NIPS 112. • 2) Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible • hose riser. 2.5 TOILET SEATS • A. Toilet Seats: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the . following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Standard America. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. • C. Centoco Manufacturing Corporation. d. Church Seats. • e. Kohler Co. f. Olsonite Seat Co. g. TOT USA. INC. h. Zurn Industries, LLC: Commercial Brass and Fixtures. • 3. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. • 4. Material: Plastic. 5. Type: Commercial(Heavy duty). • 6. Shape: Elongated rim, open front. • 7. Hinge: Check. 8. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal. • 9. Seat Cover: Not required. • 10. Color: White. • • PART 3- EXECUTION • • 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify • actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation. B. Examine counters, walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. • • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213 - 7 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-8 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • • 3.2 INSTALLATION • A. Lavatory Installation: • 1. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. • 2. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories. 3. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI Al 17.1. • 4. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed s pplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 'Plumbing • Piping Insulation." . B. Service Basin and Sink Installation: • 1. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks. • 3. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according • to ICC/ANSI At 17.1. 4. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout. 5. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink fauce . , a. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty V elves for Plumbing Piping." • b. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 6. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have a disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. . 7. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in sink deck. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer. • 8. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste . piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 20719 'Plumbing Piping Insulation." . C. Water-Closet Installation: • 1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. • 2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitti ig attachments to piping or building substrate. 3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at moun ing height for handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI Al 17.1. • D. Support Installation: • 1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures. 2. Provide waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures as required. • • E. Install toilet seats on water closets. . F. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation: 1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. • 2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittin s. • 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." . • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213-8 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PLUMBING FIXTURES • 224213-9 • G. Joint Sealing: • 1. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew- resistant silicone sealant. 2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." • 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect fixtures with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings and transition fittings as required to match fixtures and fixture connection sizes as identified on • drawings. Transition fittings shall be made at the fixture. • B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." • C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste • and Vent Piping." • D. Where installing piping adjacent to fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance. • • 3.4 ADJUSTING • A. Operate and adjust fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, • fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow. • . C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms. • 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After completing installation of fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes. B. Clean fixtures and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. . C. Install protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. • • END OF SECTION 224213 • • • • • • • • • PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213- 9 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT • 230513- 1 SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT • PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to • 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the • following: • 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. • 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 1.4 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each motor installed on the job provide submittal documentation showing motor efficiencies. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. • C. Where commercially available, motors rated 5 HP and larger shall have a power factor of not less than 90 percent under rated load conditions. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by the equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under • rated load conditions. D. All motors shall be NEMA Premium-Efficient type. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. • • • COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX , COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR H AC EQUIPMENT 230513 -2 B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and perate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with i dicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service fa tor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Premium-Efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. E. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial nd thrust loading. F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. G. Insulation: Class F . H. Code Letter Designation: • 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting charactE ristic. I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T . • 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal bo , suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise r ulses produced by , pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulatio . 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 5. Bearing Current Protection: Provide a shaft grounding device or a motor with an integral shaft grounding ring. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torqu and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. w COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-2 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513- 3 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. • E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns • to normal range. • PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 230513 w • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ! 230548 - 1 ® SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Seismic snubbers. 3. Restraining braces and cables. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. IBC: International Building Code. B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. ! C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind-Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. 2. Building Classification Category: II . 3. Minimum 10 Ib/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal. B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Specify design spectral response acceleration at short periods (0.2 second) and at 1 second based on site class in subparagraph below. Typical values range from 2 to 200 percent. Design spectral response acceleration is required for seismic force calculations to size seismic restraints. For most projects include importance factor, response factor and amplification factors as a group to include all equipment.Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D . 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II . a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5. C. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5. 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): Ss=72.4°/x. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: S1=21.6%. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation • device. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548- 1 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-2 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and , rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to • authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 1 Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to , comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equ pment weight and operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators seismic and wind restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases. . a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations requ red for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 22 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anti ipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on buildin structure, spring w deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, includin anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxilia motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmi sion, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. 4. Seismic-and Wind-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. ! b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. C. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint i details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 22 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. w d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an age cy acceptable to • authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of resti aint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). . C. Qualification Data: For testing agency. D. Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, oad, and damping w test data performed by an independent agency. E. Field quality-control test reports. • F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-2 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 3 B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mason Industries or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation, 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control, 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Vibration Mountings&Controls, Inc. B. Pads: Mason WSW: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene . 2.2 Use the following paragraph for high rise or over 4-storiesSEISMIC AND WIND-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mason Industries or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti, Inc. • 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Loos& Co.; Cableware Division. 7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut;Tyco International, Ltd. B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548- 3 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT w 230548 -4 w C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates. anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil-and water-resistant ne prene. 3. Maximum 114-inch air gap, and minimum 1!4-inch-thick resilient cushi n. • D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assem ly made of slotted w steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one nd and to building • structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosio -resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connecti ns made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. • F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. w G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and stud . w H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assem lies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and m tched to type and size of attachment devices used. I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type i zinc-coated steel . for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Selec anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Mini um length of eight w times diameter. • K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing p lyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybri mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applic ti and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as w tested according to ASTM E 488. • 2.3 FACTORY FINISHES w A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. w 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal componer is for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for in erior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-and win control devices to indicate capacity range. w w w w w VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-4 w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-5 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-and wind-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings • to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of • components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section 'Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. B. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate • snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. • C. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. G. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. • VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548- 5 • • w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 -6 i H. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. I. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. w Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other emb dded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. • 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grou has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty • sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. w 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to . installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. w 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior w applications. • 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION • A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where a jacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one . supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hydronic Piping"for piping flexible connections. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to • restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. provide temporary load-spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fast ners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. w 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 10. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system. 11. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties. 12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. w C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. • w VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 -6 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 -7 R D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism. D. Adjust active height of spring isolators. s E. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration And Training." 3.8 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE A. Supported or Suspended Equipment: Furnace. 1. Pads w a. Slab on grade floor mounted. B. Seismic— Restraint 1. Provide and install snubbers, restraint cables, hanger rod stiffener, anchor bolts etc. required by this specification. Utilizing, the site class, assigned seismic user group, building category, component importance factor, component response modification factor, component amplification factor, short period response acceleration and one second period response acceleration factor all into the required calculation to determing the extend of seismic restraint required for this project. C. Wind Restraint D. Provide and install wind restraint devices for exterior equipment. Included are snubbers, restraint cables, anchor bolts etc. that may be required by wind loading as specified in this specification. Wind speed, building category and equipment size are used in the calculations to determine the extent of wind restraint required for this project. END OF SECTION 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-7 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553- 1 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY w A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. w B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. C. Valve numbering scheme. D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. IMP B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. ! PART 2- PRODUCTS 21 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Black. �a 3. Background Color: White. !� 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 ! inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553- 1 A JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-2 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipments Drawing designation or unique equipment number, • Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, oil 8-1/2-by-1l-inch A bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be includej in operation and maintenance data. 22 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coJed, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adh sive backing. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using sam a designations or • abbreviations as used on Drawings, an arrow indicating flow direction and any special instructions noted in Part 3 of this specification. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. • 2.3 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers. w 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. • 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve • number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. • 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3- EXECUTION w 3.1 PREPARATION y� A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bor d of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible pri ners, paints, and encapsulants. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-2 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX ! IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ! 230553-3 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment Including but not limited to the following: 1. Controls: Label magnetic starters and relays to identify connecting or controlled equipment. Label manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches and thermal overload switched which have not been specified as furnished with indexed faceplates as to "connected" or"controlled" equipment. Label automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, switches, relays and starters. 2. Pumps: All pumps shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. 3. Water Heaters and Boilers: All water heaters shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. 4. Fans: All fans (air handling units, exhaust fans, etc...) shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. 5. Air Conditioning Equipment: All air conditioning equipment (chillers, condensing units, etc...) shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. 6. Fire Dampers: Identify all fire dampers and their access doors by label secured to the access door or a location approved by the Architect and accepted by the AHJ. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. ! Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed ! piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 30 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 20 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 8. For overhead piping, apply label on the lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed so marking can be read from floor level. ! B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: ! 1. Refrigerant Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 2. Natural Gas Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. C. Special Identification: For natural gas operating at 2 psig or higher the pipe label ! shall also identify the natural gas operating pressure. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-3 w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 -4 • 3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION • A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; faucets; convenience hose connections and lawn-watering hose connections. List tagged valves in a . valve schedule. 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: • a. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round. • 2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Refrigerant: Natural. • b. Gas: Natural. END OF SECTION 230553 • • • • w • w • w w • • • • • • • • • • IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-4 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 1 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ! A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS f A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. B. Sample report forms for review with 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed. C. Certified TAB reports. D. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB, TABB or a Registered Professional Engineer. All work must be done under the direct supervision of and the results attested by the Field Supervisor. ThE Field Supervisor shall be available to interpret all material found in the balance report aid shall represent w the testing and balancing firm at all requested meetings. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certifiec by AABC, NEBB r or TABB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prep re certified TAB i reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan ar d the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB forms approved by Architect. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, i Section 5, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Se ion 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in AS RAE/IESNA90.1, Section 6.7.2.3-"System Balancing." • 1.7 COORDINATION. A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include schedu ed test dates and times. • B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distributions stems have been • satisfactorily completed. w C. Coordinate all field adjustable control point settings with controls contractor. his includes but is • not limited to duct static pressure, building static pressure and flow measurement devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) • PART 3- EXECUTION w w 3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following 1. Big Horn Corp 2. MITI • 3. Precision Test& Balance, Inc. 4. Superior Balance and Commissioning 5. RGO, Belgrade, MIT • TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-2 . • A JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-3 6. Or approved equivalent. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover A conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify i that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine equipment to ensure it is in a safe and normal operable condition. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine to see if all air outlets are installed and connected. J. Examine filters; verify that final filters are clean and in place. K. Examine duct; verify that all end caps are in place. L. Examine system return air paths; check for obstructions such as walls to structure. Notify Architect of any discrepancies. M. Examine fans for proper rotation. N. Examine equipment for excessive vibration. O. Examine operating safety interlocks, thermal overload protection and controls on HVAC w equipment to verify they are in a safe and correct operating condition. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from r� indicated values. Make special note of any discrepancy between tabulated conditions and ss specified conditions including but not limited to: missing items, non-functioning items, items without final connections, etc... Call these discrepancies to the attention of the Architect. Q. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-3 w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALAN ING FOR HVAC 230593-4 w 3.3 PREPARATION • A. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 0 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. w 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance dampers are open. S. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattem adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system Dperations can be met. w 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING w A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according t the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111 or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -Testing, Adjusti g, and Balancing" w and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 -"Air Balanc ng." 0 B. Cut insulation (or drill test holes in), ducts and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes 0 to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. w 1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." . C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, fan-speed-control w levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification • material to show final settings. Set and lock all memory stops. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS w A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's utlet factors and w recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required cutlet volumes with required fan volumes. w B. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airFl w measurements. C. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. D. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. E. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. F. Check for airflow blockages. w G. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. H. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." w 0 w TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-4 0 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC • 230593- 5 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by + fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow, at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. �r 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: w a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat- recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan- motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated ® airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. ® C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-5 r JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX TESTING,ADJUSTING, AND BALAN ING FOR HVAC 230593 -6 . D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within spa ified tolerances of . indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather t an extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tole nces of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations rescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust pattems of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without draft . 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the f)Ilowing data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering-and leaving-air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: • 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. • 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. • 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature as obtained fro the mechanical contractor. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following toI rances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 10 percent to minus 5 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 10 percent to minus 5 percent . 3. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: Plus 10 percent to minus 5 p rcent. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-6 A M JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-7 3.11 POST TESTING CLOSEOUT A. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors or covers to electrical switch boxes, plugging test holes in ductwork where readings were taken and restoring thermostats to specified settings. w 3.12 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' ® balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and • balancing devices. 0 3.13 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections 0 for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the . certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers'test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 0 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. • 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. 0 Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. ® 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-7 M JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-8 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Reduced set of drawings identifying TAB contractor's diffuser labels as referenced in the report. 16. Test conditions for fans performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. • C. Cooling coil, wet-and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximu n pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. w h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: . 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Coil type. . d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. , g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NIPS. w i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. C. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. I. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. w M. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. (As obtained from the mechanical contractor.) n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. (As obtained from the mechanical contractor.) E. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufactur is factory startup • equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. i TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 8 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 40 230593-9 C. Make and type. 0 d. Model number and unit size. • e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. . h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. I. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. M. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm. ® b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. C. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. I. Operating set point in Btu/h. M. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h. F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: 0 a. System identification. ® b. Location. . C. Make and type. d. Model number and size. i e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-9 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALAN ING FOR HVAC 230593- 10 a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. G. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a di gram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. , b. Location and zone. C. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. w e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual air flow rate in cfm. . j. Actual average velocity in fpm. , k. Barometric pressure in psig. H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: . a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. M i. Effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): • a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. C. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final air flow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. • I. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Reports: 1. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): r a. Water flow rate in gpm at each valve b. Water flow rate in gpm at pump C. Static head in feet of head or psig at pump d. Voltage at each connection to pump e. Amperage for each phase at pump TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 10 ® JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 11 . f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig at pump. J. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. w C. Application. • d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. r 3.14 INSPECTIONS A. The Architect reserves the right to request that one or both of the Initial or Final inspections take place and are reported. ! B. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. 2. Check the following for each system: ® a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. C. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report. C. Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that • testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect. • 2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect. 3. Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. D. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 11 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALAN ING FOR HVAC 230593- 12 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final re ort and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and req est a second final • inspection. . 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the servi s of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documen s and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. • E. Prepare test and inspection reports. • END OF SECTION 230593 • w • • • • • • w • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • w TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 12 • 0 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX ® DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1 SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Equipment Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping Insulation." 3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts"for duct liners. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Duct: Duct located within chases, soffits, return air (ceiling) plenums, and other !s concealed locations of a similar fashion. B. Exposed Duct: Duct exposed to view within the conditioned spaces. C. Conditioned Space: Space with active heating and cooling maintaining a space temperature set point anywhere between 55 degree F and 85 degree F. Mechanical rooms, electrical rooms and ceiling plenums are NOT conditioned spaces. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets(both factory-and field-applied if any). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1 r JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DL CT INSULATION 230713-2 • 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate • ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. • 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and fors ace required for , maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. • 1.8 SCHEDULING . A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on s gments that have • satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possi le in each area of . construction. r PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS • A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General,"and "Indoo Duct and Plenum . Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. • B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloi ide content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. . D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, [Type III with factory- pplied FSK jacket or Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket. Factory-applied jacket requireme its are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: DUCT INSULATION 230713- 2 r • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DUCT INSULATION 0 230713- 3 a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. 0 C. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Coming; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap. G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ where field finishing is required or with factory-applied FSK . jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 0 a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc., FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. 0 d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. 2.2 ADHESIVES A A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. A B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 40 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges- Marathon Industries; 225. C. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60185-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when • calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 0 C. FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C. Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation . jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82. b. Eagle Bridges- Marathon Industries; 225. C. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-50. • d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when • calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 0 40 0 DUCT INSULATION 230713 -3 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • D CT INSULATION 230713-4 • 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and subst tes; comply with . MIL-PRF-19565C, Type IL 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when • calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). • B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. . 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90. . b. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perr i at 43-mil dry film . thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. • 5. Color: White. 2.4 SEALANTS • A. FSK Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a busine s of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. b. Eagle Bridges-Marathon Industries; 405. • C. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 9544. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and sut strates. 3. Fire-and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. • 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when . calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications- When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kr ft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. . 2. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type ll. DUCT INSULATION 230713-4 • w 0 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w DUCT INSULATION 230713- 5 2.6 TAPES A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: w a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. C. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. w d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. w 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. 2.7 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals, w b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 2401A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 314 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 314 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. w 4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. ® 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. w a, Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: w w DUCT INSULATION 230713-5 w w 0 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • DL CT INSULATION 230713-6 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. . 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. , 3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel or aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold • insulation securely in place but not less than 1-112 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. • 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. • b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a s ring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainle s steel or Monel. M D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickekopper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless teal or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel. 2.8 CORNER ANGLES A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. B. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 in h, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for ins Ilation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. A 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of d fects. . 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been come ted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remov materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, nd even surfaces, • free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. DUCT INSULATION 230713-6 r JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX DUCT INSULATION 230713- 7 B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. • I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. ® 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. w 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. • DUCT INSULATION 230713- 7 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX D CT INSULATION 230713 -8 N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material ove damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuo sly through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation bove roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and utdoor insulation, M install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor ins lation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 i ches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install ins lation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor ins lation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap all flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Ar Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Termin to insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. External y insulate damper • sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 in hes. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire topping"irestopping • and fire-resistive joint sealers. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. w 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended cove age rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. • 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all su ces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washe or cupped-head, . capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ucts and sides of • vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pi s along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulatio end joints, and 16 inches o.c. • DUCT INSULATION 230713-8 A JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DUCT INSULATION 230713- 9 . b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- * barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. w a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. • b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unlaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval dud elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of duds and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, w capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. DUCT INSULATION 230713-9 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX D CT INSULATION • 230713 - 10 e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with • insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape atching insulation facing. • 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, i stall a continuous • unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams nd end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of i sulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 112-inch outward-clinc ing staples, 1 inch • o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacke , adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. • a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- • barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 0 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic ap lied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, an over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equ I to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. . 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a fu I insulation section M for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as pos ible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with • individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond ins lation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on Iternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.6 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. See schedule on drawing cover sheet. 3.7 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Supply/return-air duct and plenum insulation shall be one of the following: • B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Outdoor-air duct and plenum insulation shall be one f the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: • END OF SECTION 230713 • • • • • • • • DUCT INSULATION 230713- 10 • • • M JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING M 231123 - 1 SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING . PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. . 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. • C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 prig or less. C. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig w or less. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. • 4. Dielectric fittings. FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123- 1 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATU AL-GAS PIPING w 231123-2 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS w A. Welding certificates. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in em rgency, operation, and maintenance manuals. • 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and perso nel according to AWS D1.1/131.1 M, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according t ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as d fined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applicati n. ` 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end cap through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and A moisture. B. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight. • 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment pro ided. B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installe concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section " ccess Doors and Frames." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grad B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard attern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt elding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iro seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum lass 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connecti ns, and facings: w a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. S FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-2 a JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 3 C. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME 816.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground. B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. 1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel. Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. C. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. . e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. . 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches. B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. . 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. . 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NIPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NIPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 • percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. M FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123- 3 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATU AL-GAS PIPING 231123 -4 • D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corro ion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting 'pe and threaded- end connection. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS • A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12010.12M for welding materals appropriate for • wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. w 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES . A. See "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is • applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with SME 1316.31 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. • 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME 81.20.1. • 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME 87.20.3. • 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Above round Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities he ing jurisdiction for • valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-114 inches to NIPS 2 shall have initials " OG permanently marked on valve body. • C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-112 and Larger: Comply w th ASME 816.38. • 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. • 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME 816.5 for steel flanges. • 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Above round Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials"WOG'shall be permanently marked on valve b dy. D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pr ucts by one of the following: • a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. • b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Lyall, R. W. &Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. • e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Compa y. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. . 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Aboveground anual Gas Shutoff • Valve Schedule"Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. • 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an RTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -4 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RECORDER ANNEX • FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING • 231123 -5 • 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. • E. Cast-iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: • a. Flowserve. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. C, McDonald, A.Y. Mfg. Co. • d. Milliken Valve Company. • e. Mueller Co., Gas Products Div. • f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. • 2. Listing: VBody: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. • 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. • 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles. • 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psialves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. . 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. F. Valve Boxes: • 1. Cast-iron, two-section box. • 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. • 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. . 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve. • . 2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: • 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. • 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. • 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators • NPS 2-1/2 and larger. • B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. • 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product • indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • a. Actaris. • b. American Meter Company. . C. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. • e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123- 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATU AL-GAS PIPING 231123-6 • 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. • 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and eformation at the • valve port. • 6, Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. • 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than reqt ired at maximum • pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting dow stream, and not • exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. • 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regula r. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not • connected to vent piping. • 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 10 psig. 13. See Drawing Schedule for Capacities and Characteristics. • 2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS • • A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materia s with separating • nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with ipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pro ucts by one of the following: • a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. • C. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. . e. Matco-Norca. Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. • g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, In • h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. • 2. Description: • a. Standard: ASSE 1079. • b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. • C. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferro s. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pr ducts by one of the following: • a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. • b. Central Plastics Company. C. Matco-Norca, Inc. • d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, I c. • e. Wilkins; a Zurn company. • 2. Description: • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-6 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING • 231123- 7 • a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. C, Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. • d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder- joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. • • D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: a. Advance Products& Systems, Inc. • b. Calpico, Inc. C. Central Plastics Company. • d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. • 2. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. • b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. • C. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. • e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. • 2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING • • A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective • jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION • A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping • connections before equipment installation. • B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • 3.2 PREPARATION • • A. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that • natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. • B. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. • 3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION • A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. • • B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Surround with 4 inches of clean sand before backfilling. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section"Earth Moving"for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -7 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX i FACILITY NATU AL-GAS PIPING 231123-8 • 1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in i containment conduit. • C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: i 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect join s- 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating • manufacturer. i D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. i 3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION • A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of n tural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and ar ngement of piping • systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and ca culate friction loss, • expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated u less deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. i C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in buildi g structure during • progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations, i D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except i equipment rooms i and service areas. • E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and s rvice areas at right i angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless s ecifically indicated i otherwise. • F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling pa el removal. i G. Locate valves for easy access. i H. Install piping free of sags and bends. • • I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. • J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. i K. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances nd equipment for • roughing-in requirements. i L. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate m y collect, including i service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emp ing. Do not install • where condensate is subject to freezing. • 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. i Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 6 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of dri to remove plug or i cap. i M. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. • • • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-8 i • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING • 231123-9 • N. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. • • O. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe • with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to • outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be • installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit however the piping shall have welded joints. • 2. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have • cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. 3. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from • physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. • a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker • barriers. • 4. Prohibited Locations: • • a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator • shafts. • b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions. • P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side • down. Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. • R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each • piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. • S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator. • U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." • • V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." • • W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for • HVAC Piping." • X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with • requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." • 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of flexible connector or sediment trap. • • • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 9 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX • FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123- 10 • B. Install underground valves with valve boxes. • C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space • adequate for servicing and testing. • D. Install manual gas shutoff valves on all lines before they leave the mechanical room. • 3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION • • A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. • B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. • C. Threaded Joints: • 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME 131.20.1. • 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. • 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal • threading is specified. • 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. • D. Welded Joints: • • 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and • welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufac urer at field welds • and where damage to coating occurs during construction. • 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION • A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices • specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for FVAC Piping and Equipment." • B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division23 Section • "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." • C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 318 inch. • 2. NIPS 1-114: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 318 inch. • 3. NIPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 318 inch. • 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-112: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1.2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inc . • 3.8 CONNECTIONS • • A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirery ents. Coordinate • with utility final service location, size and pressure. Provide a tee fitting with '/2 inch valve and plug on house side of meter for measuring pressure and flow. • • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 - 10 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING • 231123- 11 • B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. • • C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. • D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within • 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. Install tee fitting with '/2 inch valve and plug on house side of meter • for measuring pressure and flow. • E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting at vertical change in direction with capped nipple in bottom to • form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. An inline tee does not fulfill code - requirements. • 3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING • A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 'Identification for HVAC Piping and • Equipment'for piping and valve identification. • B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, • except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. • 3.10 PAINTING A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior • natural-gas piping. All exterior piping shall be painted. • 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • • A. Perform tests and inspections. • B. Tests and Inspections: • 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. Test all steel welded and steel threaded natural gas piping • under 60 psig air pressure. Test PE <and corregated stainless steel> tubing natural gas piping under pressures listed in the International Fuel Gas Code or as directed by the • manufacturer. • C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. • 3.12 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE • A. Aboveground natural-gas pipingshall be one of the following: 1. NPS 2 and smaller: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. • 2. NPS 2-112 and larger: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 3.13 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 5 PSIG • • A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123- 11 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 12 . B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: • 1. NIPS 2 and smaller: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. NIPS 2-112 and larger: Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints. • C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following: • • 1. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pip and fittings with • protective coating for steel piping. 3.14 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NIPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the followin 3 • 1. Bronze plug valve. • B. Valves for pipe sizes NIPS 2-112 and larger at service meter shall be the following: 1. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve. • C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NIPS 2 and smaller shall be the follow ng: • 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. • • D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NIPS 2-112 and larger shall be one oft the following: • 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. • 2. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valve. • E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: • 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. • END OF SECTION 231123 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123- 12 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METAL DUCTS • 233113- 1 • SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS • • PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • • A. Section Includes: • 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. • 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. • 4. Duct liner. • 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: • 1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. • 2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. • 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint • construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC • Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule"Article. • • B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. • • 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: • 1. Liners and adhesives. • 2. Sealants and gaskets. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: • 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. • 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. . 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. • 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. • 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. Field quality-control reports. • • METAL DUCTS 233113- 1 • • i i JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX i METAL DUCTS 233113 -2 i 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE i A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and i Equipment" and Section 7 -"Construction and System Start-up." i B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 9 .1, Section 6.4.4- "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." i PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS i i A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC uct Construction i Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. i B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duc ransverse Joints," • for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials invo ved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Star dards - Metal and Flexible." • C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct i Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal i Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, mated Is involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - i Metal and Flexible." • D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and . Flexible," Chapter4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in i SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible." i 2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS i A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction i Standards - Metal and Flexible;' Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on i indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide proc ucts by one of the • following: a. Cobb Mechanical • b. Hercules Industries C. Lindab Inc. i d. McGill AirFlow LLC. - e. Metco Inc. f. SEMCO Incorporated. i g. Sheet Metal Connectors. Inc. i h. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. i. Spir-O-Lock Spiral Pipe of Texas i j. Superior k. Lewis & Lambert i I. Western Sprial • METAL DUCTS 233113 -2 i • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METAL DUCTS 233113-3 • B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for • static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support • intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." • • 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. • C. Longitudinal Seams: Fabrication shall be according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction • Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and • other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Allowable seam types shall be RL-1 (spiral seam), RL-2/3 (lap and rivet or tack weld) and RL-4 • (butt-welded) as identified in Figure 3-2 "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams" of the above • reference standard. • 1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with RL-4 (butt-welded) • longitudinal seams. • D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct • Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials • involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction • Standards- Metal and Flexible." • 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS • A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards • Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction • methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 6531A 653M. • 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. • 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 28, • No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the"Duct Schedule"Article. D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36 1A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black • and galvanized. • 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum • ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch • minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. • 2.4 DUCT LINER • • A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." • • • METAL DUCTS 233113-3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • METAL DUCTS 233113-4 • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide proc ucts by one of the • following: • a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. • b. Johns Manville. C. Knauf Insulation. • d. Owens Corning. • e. Maximum Thermai Conductivity: • 1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean • temperature. 2) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean • temperature. • 2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form • the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NIRTIL and registered • by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. • 3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NF PA 90B and with ASTM C 916. • a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when • calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) • B. Insulation Pins and Washers: • • 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully • annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick • galvanized steel or aluminum; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. • C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - • Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." • 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive • coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers • of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal • nosing. • 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in comers of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted- edge overlapping. • 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. • 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners anJ at Intervals not • exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints End at intervals not • exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that • have either channel or"Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct w ll. Fabricate edge • facings at the following locations: • a. Fan discharges. • • METAL DUCTS 233113-4 • • • • • . JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METAL DUCTS • 233113- 5 • b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. C. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated. 9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other • buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. • • 2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and . gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: . 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. • 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. • 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). • 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless • steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. • 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. • 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. • 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when • calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). • D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. • • E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: • 1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. • 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings • and fitting spigots. • 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS • A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. • • • METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • METAL DUCTS 233113-6 • C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and • Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." • D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with Alr TM A 603. • E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM k 492. • F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with bra kets, swivel, and • bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clampin 3 device. • G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal s rews; compatible • with duct materials. • H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: • 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. • 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. . 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated wi h zinc chromate. • PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION • A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and ar angement of duct • system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were sed to size ducts • and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. • Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. • B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" • unless otherwise indicated. • C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. • • D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. • E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, aid shape and for • branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and • perpendicular to building lines. • G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent • enclosure elements of building. • H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. • I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and • enclosures. . J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed • to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal • flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sidE s by at least 1-112 inches. • • METAL DUCTS 233113-6 • • • ! JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX ! METAL DUCTS ! 233113-7 ! K. Where ducts pass through rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire and/or smoke dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and ! smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," ! Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." ! 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK ! A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. • B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use ! two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, ! and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. ! D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, . hangers and supports,duct accessories,and air outlets. ! E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these ! requirements. ! 3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD ! EXHAUST DUCT A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and ! sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood. B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals ! of 12 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom of duct. C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction. • D. All elbows to be one and one half radius type. Radius may be reduced only where space ! limitations exist after discussions with Architect. Mitered elbows and turning vanes are not . allowed. ! 3.4 DUCT SEALING ! A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct ! Schedule" Article contained within this specification according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ! Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible." ! 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, ! "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. ! METAL DUCTS 233113- 7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 Attachments shall be one of the following as allowed by the structu ZI drawings and specifications. • 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. • 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. • 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. • C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and • Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Ta le 5-2, "Minimum . Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports • within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. • E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, • bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. • F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, • tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where • used. - 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." • B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and FI xible" for branch, • outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. • 3.7 PAINTING • A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Perform tests and inspections. • B. Leakage Tests: • 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for • each test. • 2. Test the following systems: • a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct • sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed d ict area for each • designated pressure class. • 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to acco modate leakage • testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. • METAL DUCTS 233113-8 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • METAL DUCTS • 233113 -9 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating • pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. • D. Prepare test and inspection reports. • 3.9 START UP • A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing • for HVAC." 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE • A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows or as indicated in the supply, return, exhaust and outdoor air duct schedules noted below: • . B. Supply Ducts. • 1. Ducts Connected to Furnaces: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. . C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Furnaces: • a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. • d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12. D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2)Air: • a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. • d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 6. E. Outdoor-Air(Nat Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: • . 1. Ducts Connected to Furnaces: • a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 6. METAL DUCTS 233113-9 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX METAL DUCTS , 233113- 10 • F. Intermediate Reinforcement: • 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc-chromate 0 primer. • G. Liner: See schedule on drawing cover sheet. 0 H. Elbow Configuration: 0 0 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal 41 and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. C. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct • Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane • Runners,"and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Star dards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." S a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segment : Comply with 0 SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and F exible," Table 3-1, 0 "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have • proportionately fewer segments. 1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. 0 b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. 0 C. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. 0 • END OF SECTION 233113 0 • • 0 • 0 • 0 • • 40 0 • 0 i METAL DUCTS 233113- 10 0 0 0 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Control dampers. 3. Flange connectors. 4. Turning vanes. • 5. Remote damper operators. 6. Duct-mounted access doors. i 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. 9. Duct accessory hardware. B. Related Requirements: . 1. Section 233723 "HVAC Gravity Ventilators"for roof-mounted ventilator caps. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. . B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: • a. Manual volume damper installations. • b. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • AIR DUC ACCESSORIES 233300 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION • A. Comply with NFPA 90A, 'Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating S stems,.. and with • NFPA 90B, 'Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNNs "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for • acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, ro ler marks, stains, • discolorations, and other imperfections. • 2.2 MATERIALS • A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. . 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 or G90. • 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. • B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, an having a No. 2 • finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts. • C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; ith mill finish for • concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. • D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. • E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement w ere installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainles -steel ducts. • F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inch s or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches: • 2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS • • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produi s by one of the following: • 1. Air Balance Inca a division of Mestek Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products a division of Mestek Inc. • 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. • 6. Pottorff. • 7. Ruskin Company. • B. Description: Gravity balanced. • C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm. • D. Maximum System Back Pressure: 3-inch wg. • E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with melded corners or • mechanically attached and mounting flange. • • AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center/off-center/end pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch-thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges. • G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked or Neoprene, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: • 1. Material: Galvanized steel, Stainless steel, Nonmetallic or Aluminum. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum or Galvanized steel. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. • L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. • 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. . 2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS • A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: • a. Air Balance Inc.: a division of Mestek. Inc. • b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. C. Flexmaster U.S.A.. Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. • e. Nailor Industries Inc. . f. Pottorff. g. Ruskin Company. h. Greenheck • 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: • a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded comers. • C. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: • . a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel-or opposed-blade design. • C. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. • AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 7. Bearings: • a. Oil-impregnated bronze or Molded synthetic. • b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less s all have axles full • length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating 3haft. • 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. • 2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ ts by one of the • following: • 1. Ductmate Industries. Inc. • 2. Nexus PDQ: Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. • 3. Ward Industries. Inc.: a division of Hart & Cooley. Inc. • B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse lange connectors, • gaskets, and components. • C. Material: Galvanized steel. • D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. • 2.6 TURNING VANES • • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ is by one of the • following: • 1. Ductmate Industries. Inc. • 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. METALAIRE Inc. • 5. SEMCO Incorporated. 6. Ward Industries Inca a division of Hart& CooleV, Inc. • B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized heet steel; support • with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct ounting. • C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blad s of resin-bonded • fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to lades set; set into • vane runners suitable for duct mounting. • D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal • and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners,"and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." • E. Vane Construction: Double wall. • 2.7 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: • 1. Metropolitan Air Technology • 2. Pottorff. • • AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX ! AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ! 233300 - 5 . 3. Ventfabrics. lnc. 4. Young Regulator Company. ! B. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment. ! C. Tubing: Brass, Copper, or Aluminum. D. Cable: Stainless steel or Steel. ! E. Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed. F. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Match adjacent Division 26 device cover plates.. ! 2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ! following: • 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, In ! 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. ! 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. ! 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Pottorff. ! 9. Ward Industries. Inc.; a division of Hart& Cooley. Inc. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ! Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors- Round Duct." 1. Door: ! a. Double wall, rectangular. • b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. . C. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-l-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. ! e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. ! 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks. . C. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.9 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES ! A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ! following: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-5 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX . AIR DUC ACCESSORIES 233300-6 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. • 2. Flame Gard, Inc. 3. 3M. • B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. • • C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0428-inch stainless steel. • D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. • E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum • 2000 deg F. F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. • 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ is by one of the • following: • 1. Ductmate Industries. Inc. • 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. • 4. Ward Industries. Inc.: a division of Hart & Cooley. Inc. • B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. • C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. • D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inche wide attached to • two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel o 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. • E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with n oprene. • • 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. . 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. • F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, • synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. • 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. • 2. Tensile Strength: 530 Ibf/inch in the warp and 440 Ibf/inch in the filling • 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. 2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: • 1. Flexmaster U.S.A.. Inc. • 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries Inca a division of Hart& Cooley. Inc. 4. JP Lamborn • • AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-6 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 7 B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex . adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. • 4. Insulation R-value: R-6. C. Flexible Duct Connectors: 0 1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a • worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE • A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline . and grease. ep PART 3- EXECUTION 0 3.1 INSTALLATION 0 A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction w Standards - Metal and. Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMAAH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards,"for fibrous-glass ducts. r B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories • in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft and/or control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan as noted on the control drawings. Where dampers are not noted on the ! control drawings install backdraft damper on inlet. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts; this includes all duct divisions, splits, 45 degree takeoffs and round duct spin or high performance takeoffs. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat . channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. . 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. r E. See Specification Section 233713 "Diffusers, Registers and Grilles" for volume damper 0 requirements at takeoffs serving diffusers, registers and grilles. 0 F. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX AIR DUC ACCESSORIES 233300-8 G. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. • H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjustin and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: • 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. • 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backd aft dampers, and equipment. a. Exception: Where remote damper operators are used. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reir stall fusible links. • 7. Where high limit static pressure switches are not in use at the air ha cling unit access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief • access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors instal ed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream om dampers. 8. Control devices requiring inspection. • 9. At inlet to each fan. 10. Elsewhere are required by equipment manufacturer for service access. 11. Elsewhere as indicated. • 1. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Openings in ductwork for access doors shall have folded edges, if exposed, for personnel protection. K. Access door sizes shall be as noted or as required for proper access nd service to the equipment. Minimum sizes shall be as follows: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. i 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. . 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. • 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. . 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. L. Label access doors according to Section 230553 'Identification for VAC Piping and • Equipment'to indicate the purpose of access door. M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. • N. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. . O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch len the of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. • P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with stainless-steel band with worm gear. Tape outer vapor barrier securely over clamp with vapor barrier tape. • Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 8 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RECORDER ANNEX AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 9 • 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be • performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. • • END OF SECTION 233300 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-9 r • i • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HVAC POWER VENTILATORS • 233423- 1 SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary r Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceiling-mounting ventilators. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level. B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Fan speed controllers. • B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. . 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423- 1 i JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423- 2 . B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMN standards. . D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with • protective crating and covering. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final loca ion, according to i manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting poin s. 1.7 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, • reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrate)ns. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: 1. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. 2. Breidert Air Products. • 3. Carnes Company HVAC. 4. Greenheck. 5. JencoFan, Div. of Breidert Air Products. 6. Loren Cook Company. 7. NuTone Inc. . 8. PennBarry. 9. ACME B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications. C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shroul s, motor, and fan • wheel shall be removable for service. E. Grille: Plastic louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew ttachment to fan . housing. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423- 2 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • HVAC POWER VENTILATORS • 233423-3 F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. • G. Accessories: 1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 • percent. 2. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. • 3. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. • 4. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. 5. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-steel springs, and fusible link. . 6. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille. 7. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. • 8. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. H. Capacities and Characteristics: See Schedule for Capacities • 2.2 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC • Equipment." • B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • • A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, 'Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. • B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, • and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION • A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. • C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. • D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section 'Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." • 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct • connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." • • HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 3 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-4 B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. • C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." • D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Pow Br Conductors and • Cables." • 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: • 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. • 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and hat connection to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that propei thermal-overload • protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. • 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation directi n, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan driVE system, align and • adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. • 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. • 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire andsmoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. • 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. • 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators • 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. • 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. • B. Adjust belt tension. • C. Refer to Division 23 Section 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC' fo testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. • E. Lubricate bearings. • • END OF SECTION 233423 • • • • • • • HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-4 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES • 233713- 1 • SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES • • PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • • A. Section Includes: • 1. Ceiling diffusers 2. Registers and grilles B. Related Sections: • 1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. • 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume- control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GIRD: Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. • 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. • 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, • quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. • B. Where requested by the Architect provide diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify color selected. • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL GRDs A. Color and finish shall be as selected by Architect. • • B. All GRDs shall be equipped with a remote balancing damper that is adjustable through the GRD face or another approved location unless supplied from an accessible take-off with locking • damper. • C. Where connected to a variable volume system the GRDs shall be specifically designed for • variable-air-volume flows. • D. Provide safety chains on all GRDs mounted to exposed duct. • DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX . DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 -2 E. Provide square-to-round and round-to-square adaptors as required to match specified GRD with • adjoining duct. • F. Any GRD used in conjunction with a radiation damper shall be listed for this u e. • G. GRD mounting style shall be for the ceiling, wall, floor, etc... in which they ar installed. Where a GRD is used for sidewall or floor applications provide gasketing between the GRD and the • finished surface. • H. Any GRDs located in a grid ceiling shall be provided with a frame mountin style suitable to • match the grid type in which they are installed. On GRDs where the face si a is smaller than the adjoining ceiling grid, provide the manufacturer's frame to provide an installed face size of . 12x24 inches or 24x24 inches unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. • I. Any GRID located in the floor shall be listed for that application and the prod ct submittal shall • indicate the bearing capacity of the device. • J. In all wet locations including but not limited to the following: locker rooms, restrooms, shower • rooms, kitchens, etc... GRDs shall be aluminum or an approved equivalent orrosion resistant material. • K. Where aluminum GRDs are provided; provide manufacturers finish as select d by Architect or • finish suitable for field painting as directed by Architect. • L. Any GRD used for a security application shall be listed for this use to the sec rity level noted on • the Drawings. 2.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS • • A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated • on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • 1. Krueger • 2. METALAIRE, Inc. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. • 4. Price Industries. • 5. Titus, B. See Drawing Schedule for Characteristics. See Drawing Plan for Capacities. 2.3 PERFORATED GRILLES . A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated • on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • a. Krueger • b. METALAIRE, Inc. • C. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Price Industries. • e. Titus. • B. Provide duct collars as required with transition fittings to match boots and/or Cc Innected duct. • C. Where unit is not ducted or connected to a sound boot a perforated panel is acceptable. • • • DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-2 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES • 233713-3 D. See Drawing Schedule for Characteristics. See Drawing Plan for Capacities. • 2.4 REGISTERS AND GRILLES • A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated • on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Krueger • b. METALAIRE, Inc. C. Nailor Industries Inc. • d. Price Industries. • e. Titus. • B. Sidewall exhaust and return grilles/registers to have blades fixed at approximately 35 to 45 degrees. • C. Linear bar grilles material shall be aluminum. D. See Drawing Schedule for Characteristics. See Drawing Plan for Capacities. • 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, • "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." • PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION • • A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. • B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION • A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. • B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, • and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final • locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, • locate units in the center of panel. Coordinate exact location with Architectural reflected ceiling plan. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and • maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. • D. Paint ductwork visible behind GRDs matte black. • • E. Install and support all GRDs per manufacturer's recommendations. • • A DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-4 • 1. GRDs weighing less than 20 pounds shall be positively attached to eiling suspension • main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main runners. 2. GRDs weighting greater than 20 pounds, but not more than 56 pounds, in addition to the • above, shall have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to • the ceiling hangers or to the structure above. These wires may be slac . 3. GRDs weighing greater than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure • above by approved hangers. • F. Forward GIRD Ak factors to Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor. • 3.3 ADJUSTING • A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicat d, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 2337134 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FURNACES • 235400- 1 • SECTION 235400 - FURNACES • PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • • 1.2 SUMMARY • A. This Section includes the following: • 1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. • 2. Air filters. • 3. Refrigeration components. • B. Related Sections include the following: • 1.3 SUBMITTALS • • A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each of the following: • 1. Furnace. • 2. Thermostat. • 3. Refrigeration components. • B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, • required clearances, method of field assembly, components.. • C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace to include in emergency, operation, and • maintenance manuals for each of the following: • 1. Furnace and accessories complete with controls. • 2. Air filter. 3. Refrigeration components. • • D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. • 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, • Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for • intended use. • B. Comply with NFPA 70. • 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section 'Roof Accessories." • FURNACES 235400- 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX • FURNACES 235400 -2 • 1.6 WARRANTY • A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer a rees to repair or • replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or w rkmanship within • specified warranty period: • 1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion: • a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years . • b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years • C. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years . d. Refrigeration Compressors: 10 years • e. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Five years . • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING • A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, pr vide the product • indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: • 1. Amana Heating &Air Conditioning; Goodman Manufacturing Company, L.P. • 2. American Standard Companies, Inc. 3. Carrier Corporation; Div. of United Technologies Corp. • 4. Lennox Industries Inc. • 5. Trane. 6. York International Corp.; a division of Unitary Products Group. • 7. Daikin • B. General Requirements for Gas-Fired, Condensing Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, • and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and with • NFPA 54. • C. Cabinet: Steel. • 1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulat on. 2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring accesS for maintenance. • 3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color. 4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream s all comply with • requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. • D. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive. • 1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor • Requirements for HVAC Equipment." • 2. Special Motor Features: Single speed, Premium (TM) efficienc , as defined in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment," and with • internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. • 3. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. • 4. Special Motor Features: Electronically controlled motor (ECM) controlled by integrated • furnace/blower control. • E. Type of Gas: Natural. • F. Heat Exchanger: • • FURNACES 235400-2 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX FURNACES • 235400- 3 • 1. Primary: Aluminized steel. • G. Burner: • 1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety two-stage main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure • regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and • combination ignition/fan timer control board. 2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition. • • H. Gas-Burner Safety Controls: • 1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; • stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. • 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on • excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset. • I. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace • operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked. • J. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds, • adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories. • K. Accessories: • • 1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: PVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent. • 2. CPVC Plastic Vent Materials. • a. CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 4411F 441M. b. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 438, socket type. • C. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493. 2.2 THERMOSTATS • A. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounting , programmable, microprocessor-based unit with • automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, seven-day • programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings. • B. Two-Stage Heating — One-Stage Cooling Thermostat: Adjustable, heating-cooling, wall- mounting unit with fan on-automatic selector. C. Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling. • 1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair. 2. Cable Jacket Color: Blue . • • D. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Controls." • 2.3 AIR FILTERS A. Washable Filters: 1-inch-thick, urethane pad. • • • FURNACES 235400 - 3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • FURNACES 235400-4 • B. Disposable Filters: 1-inch- thick fiberglass media in sheet metal frame. ME RV 7 • 2.4 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS • A. General Refrigeration Component Requirements: • • B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with • ARI 2101240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet. • 1. Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace and evaporatoi coil, with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet • metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint. • C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, • pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths • for installation without joints, except at equipment connections. 1. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber mate ials. Comply with • ASTM C 534, Type I, 112 inch thick. • D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." • • E. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Unit: See specification section 236200 Packaged • Compressor and Condenser Units. • PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION • A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance Witt, requirements for • installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work • B. Examine factory-installed insulation before furnace installation. Reject u its that are wet, • moisture damaged, or mold damaged. • C. Examine roughing-in for gas and refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping • connections before equipment installation. • D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • 3.2 INSTALLATION • • A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to • NFPA 54. • B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if • required by installation conditions. • C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced • concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation • with concrete base. • • • FURNACES 235400 -4 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER URNANNEX ES • 235400-5 • D. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 07 Section 'Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium- plated fasteners. • 3.3 CONNECTIONS • . A. Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas • piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve. • B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap • and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. • 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. • 3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and • fittings according to the following: • a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and • solvent cements. b. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/1)2846M Appendix. • C. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC • socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. - 4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to drain terminal. D. Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Division 23 • Section "Air Duct Accessories." • E. Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant coil in furnace and to air-cooled, compressor- condenser unit. • F. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 'Refrigerant Piping" for installation and joint • construction of refrigerant piping. • 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE • A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and • perform the following: • 1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casings. • 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. • 4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. • 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational. • • B. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. • • • FURNACES 235400- 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • FURNACES 235400-6 • C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's • operational checklist. • D. Measure and record airflows. • E. Verify proper operation of capacity control device. • F. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension. • • 3.5 ADJUSTING • A. Adjust initial temperature • B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performan a and efficiency. • Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum • heating performance and system efficiency. • 3.6 CLEANING • A. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written • instructions. • B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion. • • END OF SECTION 235400 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • FURNACES 235400-6 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS • 236200- 1 • SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS • • PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • • A. This Section includes air- cooled condensing units. • 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each condensing unit, include rated capacities, operating characteristics, • furnished specialties, and accessories. Include equipment dimensions, weights and structural • loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For condensing units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. • 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of condensing • units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section 'Product • Requirements." • B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, • Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. • C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical • Refrigeration." • D. ASH RAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- 2004, Section 6-"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condensing units to comply with ASME • Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. • 1.5 COORDINATION • • A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section 'Roof Accessories." C. Coordinate location of piping and electrical rough-ins. • • PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200- 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200-2 • 1.6 WARRANTY • A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or • replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmans ip within specified • warranty period. • 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: • a. Compressor failure. • b. Condenser coil leak. • 2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period (Compressor Only): Five years from date of Substant al Completion. • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requireme ts, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, • manufacturers specified. • 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide proc ucts by one of the manufacturers specified. • 2.2 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS • • A. Available Manufacturers: • 1. Carrier Corporation; Carrier Air Conditioning Div. 2, Lennox Industries Inc. • 3. Rheem Manufacturing Air Conditioning Div. 4. Trane Co. (The); Worldwide Applied Systems Group. • 5. Weatherking Air Conditioning Div. • 6. York International Corp. 7. Daikin • B. Description: Factory assembled and tested, consisting of compressor, cc ndenser coil, fan, • motors, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls. • C. Compressor: Scroll, hermetically sealed, with rubber vibration isolators. • 1. Motor: Single speed, and includes thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. • 2. Two-Speed Compressor: Include manual-reset, high-pressure swit h and automatic- • reset, low-pressure switch. 3. Accumulator: Suction tube. • 4. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A . • 5. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A. • D. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; circuited or integral liquid • subcooler, with removable drain pan and brass service valves with service po ts. • PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200-2 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 -3 • E. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated, totally enclosed fan motor with thermal-overload protection. • • F. Accessories: 1. Crankcase heater. 2. Cycle Protector: Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid compressor cycling. 3. Electronic programmable thermostat to control condensing unit and evaporator fan. • 4. Evaporator Freeze Thermostat: Temperature-actuated switch that stops unit when • evaporator reaches freezing temperature. 5. Filter-dryer. • 6. High-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on high refrigerant • pressure. 7. Liquid-line solenoid. • 8. Low-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on low refrigerant • pressure. 9. PE mounting base to provide a permanent foundation. 10. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing. 11. Thermostatic expansion valve. 12. • • G. Unit Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. • 2.3 MOTORS • A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor • Requirements for HVAC Equipment." = 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. . 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are • specified in Division 26 Sections. • 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240, ARI 3401360, or • ARI 365. • 1. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA90.1-2004, • "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." • B. Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel • Code: Section VIII, Division 1. • C. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270. • PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of condensing units. • • PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200-3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 -4 • B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping • connections before equipment installation. • C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where condensing unit will be installed. • D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been come ed. • 3.2 INSTALLATION • • A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; main in manufacturer's • recommended clearances. B. Install condensing units on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03. • 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete slab. Unless of erwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of the base. • 2. For equipment supported on structural slab, install epoxy-coated ancho bolts that extend • through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, tern laces, diagrams, • instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supp rted equipment. • 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instr ctions. • C. Vibration Isolation: Mount condensing units on rubber pads with a minimum deflection of 1/4 • inch . Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specifed in Division 23 • Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." • D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. • E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories t iat are not factory • mounted. • 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate • general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. • B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. • C. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to unit. • Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in • Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." • 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: • • 1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. • 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist. • 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm • proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements • PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200-4 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 - 5 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 5. Verify proper airflow over coils. B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning condensing units and retest as specified above. • • 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and • perform the following: 1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing. 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. • 4. Verify that all boVts and screws are tight. 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. • 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational. B. Lubricate bearings on fans. • • C. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. • D. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. • E. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's startup checklist. F. Measure and record airflow over coils. • • G. Verify proper operation of condenser capacity control device. • H. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to • structure. • 1. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings. • 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. • • END OF SECTION 236200 • • • • • • PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200- 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX UNIT HEATERS 238239- 1 . SECTION 238239 - UNIT HEATERS • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 40 Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: • 1. Wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating coils. • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. • • B. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. C. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS • • A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. . 2. Location and size of each field connection. 3. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. • 4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished • specialties, and accessories. 5. Location and arrangement of integral controls. • 6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes. • . D. Samples for Verification: Finish colors for each type of cabinet unit heater and wall and ceiling heaters indicated with factory-applied color finishes. • E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that cabinet unit heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following: • 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. • a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any • parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." • • UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX UNIT HEATERS 238239-2 • b. The term "withstand" means"the unit will remain in place without separation of any • parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces spe ified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event" • 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of ravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. • 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the ce ification is based • and their installation requirements. • F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in eme gency, operation, • and maintenance manuals. • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as de ined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdictio , and marked for • intended use. • B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, S ion 5 - "Systems • and Equipment" and Section 7 -"Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in AS RAEIIESNA 90.1- 2004, Section 6 -"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." • PART2 - PRODUCTS . 2.1 WALL AND CEILING HEATERS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ is by one of the • following: • 1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company. • 3. Indeeco. • 4. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation. 5. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. . 6. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. • 7. Trane. 8. Raywal • B. Description; An assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, m tor, and controls. • Comply with U L 2021. • C. Cabinet: • 1. Front Panel: Extruded-aluminum bar grille, with removable pa els fastened with • tamperproof fasteners. • 2. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's stan and color selected . by Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and cei ing heaters before shipping. • 3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream 5hall comply with • requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. • UNIT HEATERS 238239-2 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX UNIT HEATERS • 238239 - 3 • D. Surface-Mounting Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet. • E. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and • hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion-resistant metallic sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with • stainless-steel hardware, and limit controls for high temperature protection. Provide integral • circuit breaker for overcurrent protection. F. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor. • 1. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." • G. Controls: Unit-mounted thermostat. • H. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection with disconnect switch. I. See Schedule for Capacities and Characteristics: • PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION • A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation • tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. • B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater • installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and • applications are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. • C. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. 3.3 CONNECTIONS • A. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995. • B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical • Systems." • C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and • Cables." • • • • • UNIT HEATERS 238239-3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX UNIT HEATERS 238239-4 , 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service repres ntative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connectio s. Report results • in writing. • B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: • 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify pro r operation and • electrical connections. • 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. • C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING . A. Adjust initial temperature set points. • B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION • A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters. Refer to Division 01 Secti n "Demonstration and Training." • • END OF SECTION 238239 • • • • • • • • • • • • • i UNIT HEATERS 238239-4 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519- 1 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES w PART 1 -GENERAL w 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY w A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less, 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. w B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data circuits. • w 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS w A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • w 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. • B. Field quality-control test reports. • . 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE w A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES w w A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: w 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. w LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-1 • w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2 2. General Cable Corporation. w 3. Senator Wire&Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company. B. [Aluminum] [and] Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types [THW] THHN-T WN [XHHW] [UF] [USE] [and] [SO]. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with w ground wire. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, man facturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. A 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rati g, material, type, w and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and applicatio . B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded fo No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIC NS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway . B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway . • LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX 0 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES • 260519-3 C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway . • D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway . A F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway . • G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-0n-Grade, and Underground: • Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. • 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. • B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to • Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will • not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." • G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." • 3.4 CONNECTIONS • A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4868. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. • C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. • • • LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260619 -3 • 40 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-4 3.5 IDENTIFICATION • A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26055 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS w A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electri al Raceways and Cabling." 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 'Penetration Firestopping." , '3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tes stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. • 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. • C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 260519 A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-4 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526- 1 SECTION 260526-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary . Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. w B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 3. Foundation steel electrodes. • 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control"Article, including the following: • 1. Ground rods. 2. Ground rings. 3. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. C. Field quality-control reports. . 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," • include the following: a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features based on NFPA 70B . GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526- 1 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain . within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. 2) Include recommended testing intervals. ! 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on- ite testing. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as de fined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applicatio . C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS w A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 40 following : 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. w 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z1Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission& Distribution, Inc. • 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as de fined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 40 0 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600V unless 0 otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-3 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 114 inch in diameter. • 5. Bonding Conductor. No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-518 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper. Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 114 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall • comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V, • • 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items • connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. . 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 Wt. • PART 3 - EXECUTION • ! 3.1 APPLICATIONS • A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. • B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 210 AWG minimum. • 1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above • finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. • • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX ' GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-4 D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: , 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors. w 3. Connections to Ground Rods: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE - A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall b connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground b,ises. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING , A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. S B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those • required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. . 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. . 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conduct r to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, eaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each u it and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a s parate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tra ing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possiblf unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conducto s where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Conductors shall not make more than a 90 degree bend with a minimum bending radius of 12 inches. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor bel w grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-4 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX ! GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-5 ® C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. ! 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. ! 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection ! is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: • 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service ! entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment . shutoff valve. ! E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. F. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a w minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. ! 1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. ! 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials if required to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bar metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future ! penetration of moisture to contact surfaces ! B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that w are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-6 C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No., 8 AWG and larger, iise pressure-type • grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. • D. Metal Raceway Terminations: Metallic raceways that terminate at metal equi ment enclosures, w cabinets, etc.; terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in enclosure, cabinet, etc. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. w E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A for copper and UL 4868 for aluminum. F. Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been w energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturers written instructions. w 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum round-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of IMP reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. ! 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenome a that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 WA and Less: 10 ohms. w 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 VA: 5 ohms. w 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 100 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). ! GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 -6 A JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX ® GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-7 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 w w s w • • • w • • w • • • • w w • • w • w w GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. w 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: w 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. w w C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. w 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE w A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL or by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." w C. Comply with NFPA 70. • D. If required by Authorities having Jurisdiction provide hangers and supports for suspended equipment over 4,500 lbs. That complies with Seismic Category 1 requirements. It shall be the w responsibility of the contractor to provide the required documentation. w w HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -2 . 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. w B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrate ns. These items are specified in Division 07 Section 'Roof Accessories." • PART 2- PRODUCTS . 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. S 1. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to Authorities • Having Jurisdiction and of type adequate to carry the loads of equipment, raceways and cables, including weight of wire in raceway. 2. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel. 3. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward we , and 9/16 inch diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. 4. Channel Thickness: Selected to suite structural loading. 5. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as chann I supports. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prod icts by one of the following: w a. Allied Tube&Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. , C. ERICO International Corporation d. GS Metals Corp e. Thomas& Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 7. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied a rding to MFMA-4. 8. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturers standard PVC, polyurethane, o polyester coating . applied according to MFMA-4. 9. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied a ording to MFMA- 4. 10. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports, 120 Volts and Above: Manufactured clevis ha gers, riser clamps, C. straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall bra kets, and spring- steel clamps or click-type hangers.> D. Cable Supports Below 120 Volts: Bridle rings installed a maximum of 4 feet 0 inches on center. E. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type. F. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. G. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel approved by the Architect.w HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -2 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 H. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. I. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. J. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. K. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their ® supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud approved by Architect, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW RamsettRed Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. w 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 5) 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in • hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. ! a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. ! 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-3 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECT ]CAL SYSTEMS 260529-4 w B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fab ications" for steel w shapes and plates. PART 3- EXECUTION ! 3.1 APPLICATION • A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and sup orts for electrical w equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: pace supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/ inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with s eel slotted support ! system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. • 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt co iduit clamps using w spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts m iy be used for 1/2- w inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communicatioi systems above • suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. E. Damp Locations: Steel materials. F. Dry Locations: Steel materials. G. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system. ! H. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturers written instructions. • 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION w A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except s specified in this w Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and , RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitt in NFPA 70. ' C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of com onents so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads, times a safety f ctor of at least 4. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be w fight of supported components plus 200 lb. • D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: w 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. w w HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-4 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts or Spring-tension clamps. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. • 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate[ by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements]. 8. Insteal of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in concrete. 9. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps or other items. 10. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 15 percent of its proof-test load. i E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. F. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation: and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. w 2. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. G. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. H. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. I. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. J. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. K. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. L. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits. M. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. N. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps. O. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports,with no weight load on raceway terminals. P. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. Q. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -5 ! JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECT [CAL SYSTEMS 260529-6 are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support ti raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. R. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control ! enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unles components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrcations" for site- fabricated metal supports. . B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignrr ant, and elevation ! to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.11D1.1 M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inc as larger in both w directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 b It diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, inforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place C ncrete ." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment ma ufacturer's setting ! drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnishe with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to sup orted equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written inst uctions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Pai it exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for CIE aning and touchup ! painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop pain on miscellaneous , metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 w w w HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -6 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 1 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems. 2. Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. w RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 1 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 C. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ is by one of the following : 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. w 2. Allied Tube &Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. • 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. • 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. w 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location nd application. • C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. w D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. w E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel i F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 5146. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel w b. Type: Setscrew or compression. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying wi h UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible extern I bonding jumper. H. Joint Compound for IMC. GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFP 70, by authorities w having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for u e to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conducti ity. • 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prod icts by one of the following : RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2, Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson &Sessions; Carton Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas& Betts Corporation. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC , complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. E. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. F. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile ® Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECT [CAL SYSTEMS 260533-4 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ is by one of the following : 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. w 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be Ii s d and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for inter ded location and application. C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, ad pters, hold-down . straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireway as required for complete system. E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 an 550 g/L or less, respectively,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Meth d 24). (� F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and pro uct requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the esting of Volatile • Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental C ambers." 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS w A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as definec in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. M Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect . 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. C. Wiremold /Legrand. C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing • characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prod icts by one of the • following a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. b. Mono-Systems, Inc. C. Panduit Corp. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -4 w w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -5 d. Wiremold/ Legrand. 2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company. • 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. s 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas& Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold/Legrand. w B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FIB 1, ferrous alloy , Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable . 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and . application. G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round or rectangular, as indicated on drawings. 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and • application. H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. • RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 r JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RE ORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-6 I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of padd a fan weighing 70 . lb. 1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and lab led as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for inten Jed location and application. J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. K. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. L. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. M. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-118 inches deep . N. Gangable boxes are allowed . O. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 wit continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's s ndard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic . 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard a amel. P. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior pa el and removable !� front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. . 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: . 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT . . 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC , . 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC . i 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R . B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -6 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • 260533-7 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT . 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC . Raceway locations include the following: 40 a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. C. Mechanical rooms. 0 d. Gymnasiums. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC . • 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. • C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. 0 D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. A 3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. • E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. w G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F . 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. • B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. 0 Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"for 0 hangers and supports. 0 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ! 260533- 8 E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slob. • F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 riches of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless of erwise indicated. 0 Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: ! 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main ! reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place con uit close to slab • support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footinterva s. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angl s with expansion ! fittings. . 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in al directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approv d by Architect for ! each specific location. J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. ! K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply ! listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound ! manufacturer's written instructions. • L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use i sulating bushings • to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside an outside=boxes ! or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and ins fated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknut . Install insulated ! throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. ! N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. 0 O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. • P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and la er, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at eact end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. R. Surface Raceways: 0 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend poi its. ! RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8 0 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-9 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. • Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue • are not acceptable support methods. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all w raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 0 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 0 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 0 U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. 4P V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 0 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run 0 length that exceeds 100 feet. w 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: • a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. 0 b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. C. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. 0 d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 0 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot 40 of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. • W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise 0 transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. 0 0 0 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 9 0 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECT ICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 10 • X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes re not individually • indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height meas red to center of box unless otherwise indicated. Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment an box. • Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they a not in the same . vertical channel. • AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spa ining two framing w members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. • CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do no support boxes by r conduits. DO. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finish d floor surface. N 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT , A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for cond it. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe les than 6 inches in . nominal diameter. 2. Install backfll as specified in Section 312000"Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansio and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to . provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfil to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and mplete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equip ent and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbow for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and • encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. . b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel co duit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equip ant base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. w RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 10 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RECORDER ANNEX RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 11 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 112-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 11 Q w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553- 1 w SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. . 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. B. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. • D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks . used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. . IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553- 1 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS i 260553-2 PART 2- PRODUCTS • 2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. • B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. • 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: • 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING'with 3-inch- high letters on 20-inch centers. D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. • 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. . C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. . 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING'with 3-inch- high letters on 20-inch centers. . D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minim urn length of color field for each raceway and cable size. . IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-2 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • 260553- 3 • B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend • label. 2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. • 2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE • A. Tape: • • 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and w locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: M 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,. • 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CAN CABLE, • COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,. 4. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 400 Ibf, and 11,500 psi. • C. Detectable Tape: • . 1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. 2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. • 4. Weight: 28 Ib/1000 sq. ft.. 5. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 Ibf, and 4600 psi. • A 2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS • ® A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: • IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 • • M JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECT ICAL SYSTEMS 260553-4 . 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with solo , legend, and size required for application. 2. 114-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate igns with 0.0396- inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size requirE d for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in comers for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following lege ds: M 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: 'DANGER - ELECTRICAL S OCK HAZARD - w EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION AREA IN FRONT t, OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INC ES." 2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for scr mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 318 inch. • 2.9 CABLE TIES • A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, s If-locking, Type 6l6 nylon. • 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. • B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposur to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking. Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3116 inch. • 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F. According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. • 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, sel locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F. According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black. • IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-4 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553- 5 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. w PART 3- EXECUTION w 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing ® without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and ® methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. w F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. • I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. • J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 6 inches below finished grade. Use w multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall. w IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-5 w • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECT ICAL SYSTEMS • 260553-6 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE • A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: T pe and stencil 4- • inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that a rids full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER C NCEALED HIGH • VOLTAGE WIRING' with 3-inch- high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop tripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces: 1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 in hes of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. • 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical hafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. • B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: elf-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, F eder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive inyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of ea h junction and pull . box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring ystem legend and • system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. • 2. Power. 3. UPS. • E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors i vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and hndholes, use color-coding conductor pe to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Les : Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger han No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. . b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. • 3) Phase C: Blue. C. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-apped turns for a • minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in box s where splices or • taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable mark ngs. i Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors • using adhesive-film-type labels. • F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. • G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. • i IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-6 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-7 • 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and • pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. ! 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. • 1. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of ! access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. 1. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs.Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. w 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: . a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay . Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1l2-inch-high letters on 1-1f2- inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. ! b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. ! d. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label secured at each end of label with machine screws. . b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. C. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. ! d. Enclosed switches. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES • 260923 - 1 SECTION 260923 -LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Time switches. 2. Indoor occupancy sensors. 3. Lighting contactors. 4. Emergency shunt relays. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section 'Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches. ! 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light-emitting diode. B. PIR: Passive infrared. ! 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS ! A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ! A. Field quality-control test reports. ! 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. • LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX LIGHTING CO TROL DEVICES 260923-2 • 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as de fined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having judsdictio , and marked for intended use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC quipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. w PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TIME SWITCHES • A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, pr vide the product • indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. <Intermatic, Inc. 4. >Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. <Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company. 6. >Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. <Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls>. 8. Square D; Schneider Electric. 9. TORK. . 10. <Touch-Plate, Inc. 11. >Waft Stopper(The). B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric w display; complying with UL 917. 1. Contact Configuration: SPST. 2. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 1201240-V ac. • 2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Lighting. • 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting;Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. <Novitas, Inc. 5. ><RAB Lighting, Inc. G. ><Sensor Switch, Inc. 7. >TORK 8. Waft Stopper(The). LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-2 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923- 3 B. General Description: Wall-or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A . tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. 0 4. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged 0 door. 0 5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal • operation of the sensor. 6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present. 0 C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and 0 movement in area of coverage. 0 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of • a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.. 2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. • ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 0 3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10- foot-high ceiling. D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of ` reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 0 2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular 40 area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. r 5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet. • E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of 0 technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 40 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 0 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX LIGHTING CO TROL DEVICES 260923 -4 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum moveme It of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and etect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a hod ontal or a vertical • manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. M 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywherE within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. • 2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES • A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. • Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." • B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductor not smaller than • No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltag Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." • • PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION • A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written ir structions. • 3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure- borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory installed vibration . isolators. • 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION • A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical I lower Conductors • and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited anc nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturers written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturers written ii structions, unless • otherwise indicated. • D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in • junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. • • • LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 -4 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES • 260923-5 • 3.4 IDENTIFICATION • A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: • 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been • energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. • B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. • 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION • A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." • • END OF SECTION 260923 r • r • • • LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PANELBOARDS • 262416- 1 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS • • PART 1 -GENERAL • • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: • • 1. Distribution panelboards. • 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. • • 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. SPD: Surge Protection Device. • 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS • • A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions • and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, • and finishes. • B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. • • 1. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. • 3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent • protective devices and auxiliary components. • 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent • protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 8. If required on the project, provide UL testing for series rating of installed series rated • devices documenting compatibility of devices. • • . PANELBOARDS 262416- 1 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PANELBOARDS 262416-2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. • • • B. Field Quality-Control Reports: • • 1. Test procedures used. • 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test resul s that comply with • requirements. • C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final v rsions after load • balancing. • 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • • A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to incl ide in emergency, • operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in I ivision 01 Section • "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: • 1. Manufacturers written instructions for testing and adjusting ove urrent protective • devices. • 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of ov rcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. • • 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packa ed with protective • covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. • • 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. • 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protect on (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. • 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and • accessories from single source from single manufacturer. • • • • PANELBOARDS 262416-2 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PANELBOARDS • 262416-3 • C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. • D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, • Article 100, by UL or by a qualified testing agency acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction • and marked for intended location and application. • E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. • F. Comply with NFPA 70. • • 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard)to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Environmental Limitations: • • 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary • HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions • at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise • indicated: • a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: • 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. • 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. • • 1.11 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, • raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. • Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. • • B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in • Division 03. • • PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& REC ORDER ANNEX • PANELBOARDS 262416-4 • 1.12 WARRANTY • A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer a 3rees to repair or • replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or w rkmanship within • specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. • • PART 2- PRODUCTS • • 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS • A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in • Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." • B. Enclosures: Flush-and surface-mounted cabinets as indicated on drawings • • 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. • a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 . • b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R . C. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, [Type 4] <In ert type>. • d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: • NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to box with screws. For surface-mounted fronts, math box dimensions; • for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. • 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard Joor within hinged trim cover. (Door-in-Door Construction Cover) • 4. Finishes: • a. Panels and Trim: Steel factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on fnish consisting of • prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. • 5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card older. Cards shall • be numbered odd on the left side and even on the right side. • C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. • D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: • • 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent cond ictivity. • 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit eq jipment grounding • conductors; bonded to box. • E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. • • 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. • 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. • 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. • • • PANELBOARDS 262416-4 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PANELBOARDS • 262416-5 • 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. • 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at • same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra- capacity neutral bus. • F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load • centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. • G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or • remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type • of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. • H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit • current available at terminals. • • 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: • B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable • products by one of the following: • 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. • 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. • 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. • C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. • D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. E. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as shown on drawings. • F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. • • G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: • Bolton circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. • • 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following: • • 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. • • PANELBOARDS 262416-5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& REC ORDER ANNEX • PANELBOARDS 262416-6 • 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. • 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. • B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. • • C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as indicated on drawings. • D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing • adjacent units. • E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed al ke. • • 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following : • • 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. • 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distri ution. • 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. • B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to • meet available fault currents. • • 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, • and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. • 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Cl ss A ground-fault • protection (5-mA trip). 3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB) Features and Accessories: • a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. • b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. • C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SVID for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity • discharge (HID) lighting circuits. Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, and • refrigeration equipment. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable • pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. • e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. • f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit breaker handle in • on or off position. g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position. • • 2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES • A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for ove current protective • device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. • • PANELBOARDS 262416-6 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PANELBOARDS • 262416-7 • PART 3- EXECUTION • • 3.1 EXAMINATION • A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or • have been subjected to water saturation. • C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation • tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. • D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • • 3.2 INSTALLATION • • A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. • Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place • Concrete ." • 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. • 2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base • and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, • instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. • 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard. • • B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. • • C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Mount top of trim [74 inches] above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. • E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed • panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. • F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. • • 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. • G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. • H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing • load balancing. Do not splice conductors in panelboard gutter. • I. Comply with NECA 1. • • . PANELBOARDS 262416-7 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& REC ORDER ANNEX • PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8 • J. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main • electrical ground bus. • K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's ublished torque- • tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use tho a specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. L. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboard . Remove paint • splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Touch up scratches and marred finished to match original finish. • • 3.3 IDENTIFICATION • A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components provide warning • signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems.' - B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads[ after balancing p nelboard loads]; - incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a • computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. • 1. Directory shall provide identification for every circuit or circuit modification as required by • the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. • C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated plastic • nameplate with corrosion resistant screws complying with requirements for identification • specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." • D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution p nelboards with a • nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Dvision26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." • • 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, Wrinecting supply, • feeder, and control circuit. • 2. Test continuity of each circuit. • B. Tests and Inspections: • • 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tes stated in NETA • Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test pararn ers. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate • compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. • 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days • after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each pan (board. Remove • front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. • • PANELBOARDS 262416-8 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PANELBOARDS • 262416 -9 • b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. • C. Instruments and Equipment: . 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. • • D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. • • 3.5 ADJUSTING • A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as • recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges [as indicated] [as specified in Division 26 Section • "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."] • C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final • Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. • • 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of • the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax • machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings • before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum • requirement. • 3.6 PROTECTION • A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's • written instructions. • • END OF SECTION 262416 • • • • • • • • • PANELBOARDS 262416 - 9 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX WIRING DEVICES • 262726- 1 • SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. This Section includes the following: • 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Wall-box motion sensors. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. • 4. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet • assemblies. • B. Related Sections include the following: • 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling"for workstation outlets. • • 1.3 DEFINITIONS • • A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. • B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. • C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. • E. SPD: Surge Protection Device. • F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. • • 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: • 1. Receptacles for Owner-Fumished Equipment: Match plug configurations. • • 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • • WIRING DEVICES 262726- 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • (RING DEVICES 262726-2 B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking • wall plates. • 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • • A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing • label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. • 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one • source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as d fined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdictio i, and marked for • intended use. • C. Comply with NFPA 70. , • PART2 - PRODUCTS • • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following ' • manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: • 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). • 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). • 3. Pass& Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices&Accessories (Pass& Seyr iour). • 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES • • A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA D 6 configuration . 5-20R, and UL 498. • 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: • a. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). • b. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). • C. Pass &Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). • 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES • A. General Description: Straight blade, feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, • NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. GFCI shall have safe lock protection. If critical components are damaged and • ground fault protection is lost or if mis-wired, power to receptacle is disconnected. Provide • tamper resistant devices as required by current codes. WIRING DEVICES 262726-2 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX WIRING DEVICES • 262726-3 • B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: • 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pass&Seymour; 2095 • b. Leviton; S7899 C. Hubbell; GF20 • C. Weather-Resistant GFCI Receptacles, 125V, 20A: • 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be • incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • a. Pass&Seymour; 2095TRWR • b. Leviton; VV7899-TR c. Hubbell; GFTR20 2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS • A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of . equipment being connected. • 1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. • 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. • • 2.5 SNAP SWITCHES • A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. • B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: • a. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). • b. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). C. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), PS20AC2 (two pole), PS20AC3 (three . way), PS20AC4 (four way). • C. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: • a. Hubbell; HBL1221L. b. Leviton; 1221-2L. • C. Pass& Seymour; PS20AC1-L. • 2. Description: Single pole,with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. • • WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK R RE ORDER ANNEX IRING DEVICES 0 262726-4 • D. 2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 0 A. Wall-Switch Sensors: • 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be w incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; WS1277. b. Leviton; ODS 104D. C. Pass & Seymour; WS3000. d. Watt Stopper(The); WS-200. • 3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.. . B. Wall-Switch Sensors: • 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, p ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V. • b. Leviton; ODS 15-ID. 3. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 1201277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 , minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 90 sq. ft. lip C. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors: . 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, pro ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: . 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; ATP1600WRP. b. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW. C. Pass & Seymour; WA1001. . d. Watt Stopper(The); CX-100. • 3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, . 110-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft.. D. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors: . 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, proc ucts that may be 40 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP. • b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW. C. Watt Stopper(The); DT-200. • 0 Is WIRING DEVICES 262726-4 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX WIRING DEVICES • 262726- 5 • 3. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a • minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. E. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors: • • 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: • a. Hubbell; ATP120HBRP. b. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW. C. Pass & Seymour; HS1001. • d. Watt Stopper(The); CX-100-3. • 3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, • 150-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. • • 2.7 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. • 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic • 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. • 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in"wet locations." • • B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather- resistant , die-cast aluminum with lockable cover and rated weatherproof while in-use. • 2.8 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush-type , dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. • B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. • C. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. D. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening . • E. • F. • 2.9 FINISHES • A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. • 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White , unless otherwise • indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. • 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red . • • • WIRING DEVICES 262726-5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX - WIRING DEVICES 262726-6 • PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.1 INSTALLATION • A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard unless otherwise noted. • B. Coordination with Other Trades: • 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish • materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, • paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and . cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint • unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is con 1plete. , C. Conductors: - 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are splice or terminated on • devices. • 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for tir a purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. • 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provi ions of NFPA 70, • Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and for ign matter. • C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet bo is large enough. • D. Device Installation: , 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show • signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. • 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect . conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last • possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. • 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw ter inals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal scre . 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. • 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 2 -A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers sed to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: • • • WIRING DEVICES 262726-6 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX WIRING DEVICES 262726- 7 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up , and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. • . F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. • • G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. • 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. • H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical • and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and • furnishings. J. Mounting Heights: Dimensions given are from finished floor to centerline of outlets. Adjust heights of outlets in masonry walls per Division 16 Section • "Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets." Notations on drawings and ADA requirements supersede • the following: • K. Wall Switches L. 4 feet—0 inches M. Wall Mounted Occupancy Sensors N. 4 feet—0 inches • • O. Convenience Outlets P. 1 foot—6 inches • Q. Kitchen and Workroom Wall Outlets R. 3 feet—8 inches • S. Standard Communication Outlets T. 1 foot-6 inches • U. Communication Outlet marked as Wall V. 4 feet—0 inches • W. Thermostats X. As directed by Division 23 • Y. Sound, Paging, Monitoring and Call System Z. 4 feet—0 inches • Wall Devices • AA. Nurse Call System Wall Devices BB. 4 feet—0 inches • CC. Clock outlets DD. 7 feet—0 inches or as noted • 3.2 IDENTIFICATION • A. Comply with Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, • stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and • durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. • WIRING DEVICES 262726-7 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX . (RING DEVICES 262726 - 8 • 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. • 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: • • 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. • 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher s not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. • 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securel mounted. • 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the . circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, de ctive devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace • with new ones, and retest as specified above. • C. Test straight blade convenience outlets in patient-care areas for the ret ntion force of the • grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less thar 4 oz. • • END OF SECTION 262726 . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • WIRING DEVICES 262726-8 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER INTER LIGHTING . 265100- 1 SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section 'Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CRP. Color-rendering index. C. CU: Coefficient of utilization. D. HID: High-intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. • G. RCR: Room cavity ratio. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX INT RIOR LIGHTING 265100-2 • 6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each Ii hting fixture type, . outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indica ed for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current • accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program • (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. • B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-control)Bd fixtures, signed • by product manufacturer. • C. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. • D. Field quality-control test reports. • E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, • operation, and maintenance manuals. • 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective • covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. • 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish a least one of each • type. 2. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for ever f 50 emergency • lighting unit. . 3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furn sh at least one of each type. • 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Acc editation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. • B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as d fined in NFPA 70, • Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdictio , and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. • • 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other • construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HV C equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. • • INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -2 • • ! . JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3 1.9 WARRANTY ! A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which • manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ! 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of ! Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. ! 2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years. B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer • agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. ! C. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period • indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: One year(s)from date of Substantial Completion. ! PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ! A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. ! B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to ! NEMA LE 5A. ! C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to . NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. ! D. Fluorescent luminaires that utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced in place shall have a disconnecting means either intemal or external to each luminaire. For existing installed luminaires without disconnecting means, at the time a ballast is replaced, • INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-4 • a disconnecting means shall be installed. The line side terminals of the disconnecting means • shall be guarded. E. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. • F. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. G. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. H. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of lic ht leakage under • operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to • prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. . 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. J. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: • 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing • and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. • a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated. • b. UV stabilized. • 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. • • 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; programmed-start type, unless otherwise • indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts sh II be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. • 1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. . 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher. • 7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. . B. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply wiO ANSI C82.11 and • the following: • 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. • 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. • INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -4 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX ! INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-5 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor. 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. • 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless ! dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. ! 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. ! 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. ! 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. ! 9. Power Factor. 0.98 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. 2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT ! A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched ! circuit to fixture ballast. • 2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or . entering ceiling space. • a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. • 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. • 2.6 EXIT SIGNS • A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide 10% spare of each exit sign specified for areas requiring additional signage per the AHJ. ! INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-5 ! • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-6 C. If not used, return to Owner as spare equipment. • D. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger i I a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer re ay. • C. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automati illy recharged and - floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulat s loss of normal • power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glo indicates trickle • charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. - • 2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS • A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. • 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circt it voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically discon acts from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; • bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. • 2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 • initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature [4100] K, and average rated life . 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length o 24 inches, 1300 • initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature [4100] K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. D. T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature [4100] K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. • • INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-6 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -7 E. T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. F. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K. average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise ® indicated. 1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens(minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens(minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens(minimum). 2.9 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 112-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. iPART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element. • 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture comer with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-7 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-8 ! 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. • 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. ! D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. • E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." • 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify ! transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verificatic ns indicating and • interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, rete t to demonstrate . compliance with standards. • C. Whenever luminaires are used for work during construction they shall be relamped with the ! Project specified lamp just prior to turnover of the project to the Owner. • END OF SECTION 266100 ! • ! • w • • • • • • • • • • • • • ! ! • INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-8 • ! • . JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600- 1 SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING • PART 1 -GENERAL 11 RELATED DOCUMENTS ! A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ! A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section"Interior Lighting"for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CRI: Color-rendering index. B. HID: High-intensity discharge. C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. D. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination. ! E. Standard: Same definition as"Pole" above. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. . 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX EXT RIOR LIGHTING 265600-2 • 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attach ent is suitable for components involved. . B. Shop Drawings: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring. • • 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. • B. Field quality-control test reports. • C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 0 A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergeni y, operation, and • maintenance manuals. • 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided y manufacturers' , laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Acc editation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. • B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as d fined in NFPA 70, • Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdictio , and marked for intended use. • C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." • D. Comply with NFPA 70. r 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer a rees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; o that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, van alism, abuse, or . unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial C mpletion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substan ial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substant al Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail with n 12 months from 40 date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. . • • EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-2 • S JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX EXTERIOR LIGHTING . 265600-3 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is • based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. ! 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations • by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for • luminaires. • C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. ! D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. ! E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather-and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform ! in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or . replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. . G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. ! H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, • and UV radiation. ! I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: • 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. ! 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. ! J. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and • cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. ! K. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. . L. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. i EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-3 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • EXT RIOR LIGHTING 265600 -4 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "So vent Cleaning," to i remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair aint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, 'White Metal • Blast Cleaning,"or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enary el. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colo . M. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM' "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applyi g and designating finishes. 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system establishe by the Aluminum . Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Fini h: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;Anodic Coating: Architectur I Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thick r) complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: As specified on drawings. 2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS A. Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for re iable starting and . operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. B. Ballast Characteristics: 1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor, . Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A r better. . C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and o ration with ballast provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. • D. Fluorescent Lamps: Low-mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity ch racteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when sted according to • NEMA LL 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. . B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-4 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER EXTERIOR LIGHTING • 265600-5 • C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and . interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate w compliance with standards. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 265600 r i i EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600- 5 r • • . JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526- 1 SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS • SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL • • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • • 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding busbars. 4. Grounding rods. 5. Grounding labeling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications. B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. C. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar. • D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar. • 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. • 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure, including the following: • 1. Ground rods. • 2. Ground and roof rings. 3. BCT, TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors. • B. Qualification Data: For installation supervisor, and field inspector. • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 1 • • i 0 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX . GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICA IONS SYSTEMS 270526- 2 0 C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. • D. Field quality-control reports. 0 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergen y, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and aintenance Data," include the following: a. Result of the ground-resistance test, measured at the point of B T connection. b. Result of the bonding-resistance test at each TGB and its nearest grounding electrode. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BI SI on staff. 1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct upervision of ITS Technician , who shall be present at all times when Work of this Sect on is performed at w Project site. 2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as ITS Installer 2 to erform the on-site inspection. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with J-STD-607-A. i 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide produc by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,t e following]: . 1. Hanger Lightning and Grounding. 2. Panduit Corp. i 3. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Comply with UL 486A-4866. w C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yello v stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V. and complying with UL 83. • 1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall I a No. 6 AWG, 19- . strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire. 2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-2 r • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS • 270526 - 3 • D. Bare Copper Conductors: • 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in diameter. • 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole • copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.3 CONNECTORS A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 . for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A486B. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Burndv: Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Hanger Lightning and Grounding. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467. • 1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped. D. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed • for the purpose. E. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type, • mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a • two-bolt connection to the busbar. F. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for . materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 3. Panduit Corp. • • • • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS • 270526-4 • B. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, [114 by 4 • inches] <Insert dimensions> in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with JSTD-607-A. • 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. • 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a [4-inch] clear nce to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel. • 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. C. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, [1/4 by inches] <Insert • dimensions> in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busb r shall be for wall • mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply w th J-STD-607-A. • 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. . 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-nch clearance to • access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless st 1. 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in • 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. • D. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting • conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 210 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with J-STD-607-A. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. • 1. Cabinet-Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or Copp r-plated hardware . for attachment to the cabinet. 2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 3-inch equipment racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining ck, and stainless- . steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack. 3. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 or 36 inchesstainless-steel or copp r-plated hardware • for attachment to the rack. • • 2.5 LABELING • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available man facturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: • 1. Brother International Corporation. • 2. HellermannTvton. • 3. Panduit Corp. • B. Comply with TIAIEIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materia s, including label • stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. • C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in lack, by thermal • transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Over ay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. • • • • • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-4 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS • 270526-5 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with • requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system. B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance, • and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with J-STD-607-A. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. . 2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. • B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2 AWG minimum. C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. D. Conductor Support: 1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches . E. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526- 5 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& REC ORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 -6 . 1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees. 2. Install without splices. • 3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a • plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated. a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond • the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with ID in Section 270528 'Pathways for Communicatio s Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB. 3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM 40 A. The BCT between the TMBG and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than No. 1/0 AWG. IS 3.5 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. 3.6 CONNECTIONS • A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the gr unding busbar in • that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AW 3. 0 B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars. C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturers written instructions and as follows: 1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections. D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor. E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone • conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and g unding equalizer • conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot of conductor length, up to a maximum size of No. 310 AWG unless otherwise indicated. F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Instal I rack grounding GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-6 A i JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 -7 busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors. G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame. H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the panelboard. I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and spaces. Comply with TIAIEIA-568-B.1 and TIAIEIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables. J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section. K. Access Floors: Bond all metal parts of access floors to the TGB. L. Equipment Room Signal Reference Grid: Provide a low-impedance path between telecommunications cabinets, equipment racks, and the reference grid, using No. 6 AWG bonding conductors. 1. Install the conductors in grid pattern on 4-foot centers, allowing bonding of one pedestal i from each access floor tile. 2. Bond the TGB of the equipment room to the reference grid at two or more locations. i 3. Bond all conduits and piping entering the equipment room to the TGB at the perimeter of the room. i3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type. 1. Label TMGB(s)with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for i the space containing the TMGB. 2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the i space containing the TGB. 3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point: "WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!" 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. • B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, . electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-7 • A JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 8 2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth group -resistance tester, • taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommendec by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation. a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest a ailable grounding • electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms. 3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent. • a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the comm nications system electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the . TMGB and in each TGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level i 1 A. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceec s 5 ohms, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-8 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS . 270528- 1 SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. • 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. • 5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 6. Surface pathways. • 7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems. 2. Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security. • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, • documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of . Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 1 r JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICA IONS SYSTEMS 270528-2 C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevat ons, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which he following items • are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of ite s involved: 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports • 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of nduit groups with common supports. i B. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available man ifacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube &Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Alpha Wire Company. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Company. 6. O-Z1Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. • 7. Picoma Industries; Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit. 9. Robroy Industries. . 10. Southwire Company. 11. Thomas& Betts Corporation. • 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. • 13. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: ` 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for • intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-13. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. i D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. E. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply vith UL 886 and NFPA 70. . 2. Fittings for EMT: • a. Material: Steel PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528-2 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 3 w b. Type: Setscrew or compression. 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for • environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. w F. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities • having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and • protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS . A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering . products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: . 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube &Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Amco Corporation. 5. CANTEX Inc. 6. CertainTeed Corp. • 7. Condux International, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Company. 9. Kraloy. 10. Lamson &Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 11. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 12. RACO; a Hubbell company. • 13. Thomas& Betts Corporation. M B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for . intended location and application. • 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. . C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC , complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. M D. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651 B. 0 • F. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 0 G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, ` respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements • of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528- 3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICA IONS SYSTEMS 270528 -4 2.3 SURFACE PATHWAYS • A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for • intended location and application. ` 2. Comply with TIA-569-13. • B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. • Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect . • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. • C. Panduit Corp. • d. Wiremold/Legrand. • C. Surface Nonmetallic Pathways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL-94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing • characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, avails le manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, • the following: • a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. • b. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. C. Mono-Systems. Inc. d. Panduit Corp. e. Wiremold/ Legrand. • • 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ is by one of the • following : • 1. Adalet. • 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. • 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. • 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. • 7. Lamson &Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co. • 9. Molex;Woodhead Brand. • 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. • 12. RACO; a Hubbell company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. • • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528-4 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS • 270528 - 5 • 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold /Legrand. • B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet • locations. • C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. • E. Metal Floor Boxes: • • 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable . • 3. Shape: Rectangular. • 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and • application. F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round or rectangular. • • 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and • application. • G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. • H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast • aluminum with gasketed cover, I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep . J. Gangable boxes are allowed . • K. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. • L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge • cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. • 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. • 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: • a. Material: Plastic . • b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. • • M. Cabinets: • • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528-5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 -6 • 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 , galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable • front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. • 3. Key latch to match panelboards. • 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. • 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. • • PART 3- EXECUTION • • 3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION • A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indic ted: • • 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC • 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT . 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC , • 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R . • B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: • 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT . • 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT . • 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC . Pathway locations include the • following: • a. Loading dock. • b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet handling units. C. Mechanical rooms. • d. Gymnasiums • 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT • 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC . 6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental • Air: Plenum-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway . • 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Verti I Shafts: Riser- type, optical-fiber-cable pathway . • 8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or • Communications Cable: Plenum-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Typ D 4 nonmetallic in • institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. • C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber c bles is 1 inch. • D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. • • 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel con uit fittings unless • otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings liste for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in VC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting nanufacturer and • apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer • • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 -6 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS • 270528- 7 • 3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. • E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. • F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. • • G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F . • • 3.2 INSTALLATION • A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where • requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific • occupancies and number of floors. • B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. • Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. • C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. • D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for • hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. • F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables. • • G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. • • H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. • I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: • 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main • reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab • support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. • 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for • each specific location. • J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: • 1. Use EMT or RMC for pathways. • 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or • in an enclosure. • K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply • listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. • • • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528-7 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528-8 • L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside arid outside of boxes • or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts. • M. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures wit i locknuts. Install • locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. • N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings • in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a contir uous ground path. • O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll • cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length. • P. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not • less than 200-Ibtensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use. • Q. Surface Pathways: • 1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. • 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. • Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue • are not acceptable support methods. • R. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and • nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: • 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. • 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway • unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes • or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. • S. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with • listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a • blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. • T. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all • pathways at the following points: • 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as bounda 'es of refrigerated • spaces. • 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. • U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings. • • V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: • • • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270628 - 8 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS • 270528-9 • 1. Install in eadh run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. • Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where • environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. • 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each • of the following locations: • a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. • b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. • C. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. • d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. • 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot • of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install • fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. • 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure • expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time • of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. • W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually . indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. • X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, • and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a • raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. • Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same • vertical channel. • Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing • members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. • AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by • conduits. • BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. • CC. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. • 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT • • A. Direct-Buried Conduit: • 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench • bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. • 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." • • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528-9 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528- 10 • 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of • conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches • of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving.' • 4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and • at building entrances through floor. • a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each • side of the coupling. • b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where • conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install • insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 553 "Identification • for Electrical Systems." • • 3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS • A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply • with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways • and Cabling." • 3.5 FIRESTOPPING • • A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assembles. Comply with • requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." • 3.6 PROTECTION • • A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. • 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint ecommended by • manufacturer. • 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matchinc touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. • • • • END OF SECTION 270528 • • • • • • • PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 10 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING • 271300 - 1 • SECTION 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING • PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • • A. Section Includes: • 1. Pathways. • 2. UTP cable. 3. [62.51125]-micrometer, optical fiber cabling. • 4. Coaxial cable. • 5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 6. Cabling identification products. • • B. Related Sections: • 1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and • data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. • B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection • or cross-connection. • C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. • E. LAN: Local area network. • F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. • G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. • • 1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION • • A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system • structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, • mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross- connection. • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300- 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-2 • B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at • entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling. • 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • • A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in • TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. • 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS • • A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • B. Shop Drawings: • 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and • format selected by Owner. • 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the • cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. • 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following: • a. Cross-connects. • b. Patch panels. • C. Patch cords. 5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, ands ow elevations and • physical relationship between the installed components. • 6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray • and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: • a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. • b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. C. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceili g structure. • d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceed i rig manufacturer's • rating for tray and its support elements. • 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. Qualification Data: For [Installer, ]qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. B. Source quality-control reports. • • C. Field quality-control reports. • D. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance ma uals. • • 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • A. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-2 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING • 271300-3 • 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data • files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. • • 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS • • A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. • 1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. • 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. • • 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. • 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level • Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at • Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. • • B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. • 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise • on-site testing. • C. Surface-Buming Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to • ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. • 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. • 2. Smoke-Developed Index: [450 <Insert value> or less. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, • by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. • F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. • • 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING • A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. • 1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. • 2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify • the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. • 3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300- 3 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-4 • 1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet • work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining • ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. • • 1.13 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and ca ling with Owner's • telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. • • 1.14 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT • A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide softwa a support for two • years. • B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program • software upgrades that become available within twoyears from date of Substantial Completion. - Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. • 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to s stem and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. • • PART2- PRODUCTS • • 2.1 PATHWAYS • A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. • • B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent • degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. • 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets . 2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 3. Straps and other devices. • C. Cable Trays: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers • offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not • limited to,the following: • a. Cable Management Solutions. In • b. CablofilInc. • C. Cooper B-Line. Inc. d. Cope -Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit. • e. GS Metals Coro. • • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-4 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING • 271300- 5 • D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 'Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." • 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm)wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep. • • 2.2 BACKBOARDS • • A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated,3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements in Section 061000 'Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing • panels. • • 2.3 UTP CABLE • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering • products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the • following: • 1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. • 3. CommScope, Inc. • 4. Draka USA. 5. Genesis Cable Products Honeywell International, Inc. • 6. KRONE Incorporated. • 7. Mohawk: a division of Belden CDT. 8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. • 9. Superior Essex Inc. • 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions a CommScope Inc. brand. 11. 3M. • 12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect' Tyco International Ltd. • B. Description: 100-ohm, 50 -pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a gray • thermoplastic jacket and overall metallic shield. • 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, [Category 5e] [Category 6]. • 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying • with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: • a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG[; or MPP, CMP, MPR, • CMR, MP,or MPG]. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP[ or MPP], complying with NFPA 262. • C. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR[; or MPP, CMP, or MPR], complying • with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX[; or MPP, CMP, MPR, CMR, MP, MPG,CM,or CMG]. • e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG[; or MPP or MPR]. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. • g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR[or MPP], complying with UL 1666. • • • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300- 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX . COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-6 • 2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE . A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the • following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the • Work include,but are not limited to,the following]: 1. American Technology Systems Industries. Inc. • 2. Dvnacom Corporation. 3. Hubbell Premise Wiring. • 4. KRONE Incorporated. 5. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 6. Molex Premise Networks: a division of Molex. Inc. 7. Nordex/CDT a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. • 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The). • 10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect: Tyco International Ltd. • 11. <Insert manufacturer's name>. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA EIA-568-B.2, IDC • type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall tie terminated with • connecting hardware of same category or higher. • C. Connecting Blocks: [110-style IDC for Category Se] [110-style IDC for Category 6] [66-style • IDC for Category 5e]. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus • [25] <Insert number> percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and • permit interconnection between cables. • 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. • • E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDCAype connectors at . each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicate . F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. • G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair cables in [36-inch (900-mm)] lengths; terminated with 8- • position modular plug at each end. • 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure • Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards t protect against snagging. • 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification. . • 2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering • products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the • following: • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-6 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 0 271300-7 1. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 2. CommScope, Inc. 0 3. Corning Cable Systems. . 4. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 5. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 6. Nordex/CDT a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. • 7. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division Emerson Network Power. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. SYSTIMAX Solutions: a CommScope Inc. brand. 10. 3M. 11. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. • B. Description: Multimode, 62.51125-micrometer, 24 -fiber, nonconductivetight buffer, optical fiber cable. • 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. • 3. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: • a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. C. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. • d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262. • f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666. 4. Conductive cable shall be steel armored type. 5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. . 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm. C. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Orange for 62.51125-micrometer cable. • 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm). 2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the • following: 1. ADC. • 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 4. Corning Cable Systems. • 5. Dynacom Corporation. 6. Hubbell Premise Wiring. • 7. Molex Premise Networks: a division of Molex. Inc. 8. Nordex/CDT: a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 9. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division Emerson Network Power. 10. Siemon Co. (The). COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS BAC BONE CABLING 271300 - 8 • B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numb red, duplex cable • connectors. • 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cable assigned to field, • plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion c iteria. • C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch (900-mm) lengths. • D. Cable Connecting Hardware: • 1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCI ) specifications of • TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TI EIA-568-B.3. • 2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB. • 3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages. • • 2.7 GROUNDING • A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for lectrical Systems" • for grounding conductors and connectors. • B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. • • 2.8 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS • A. Comply with TIAIEIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling mated Is, including label • stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. • • 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. • • B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1. • C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. • D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A an TIA/EIA-568-B.3. • • E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. • F. Prepare test and inspection reports. • • PART 3 - EXECUTION • • 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES • A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation pint provided by • communications service provider. • • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-8 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-9 • 3.2 WIRING METHODS • A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, • desks, and counters[and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used]. Conceal raceway and • cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. • 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." • B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where • possible. • C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. • Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. • • 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A. • B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general • arrangement of pathways and fittings. • C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends • between pull points. • D. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 'Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for .• installation of conduits and wireways. • E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. • • F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: • 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood • is installed, or in the comer of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. • 4. Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm) above finished floor. • 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to • grounding system. • G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent • sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. • 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES • A. Comply with NECA 1. • B. General Requirements for Cabling: • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300-9 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300- 10 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-6.1. • 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. • 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make • terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervalE not exceeding 30 • inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabin ats, boxes, fittings, • outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent • bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. • 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BI SI ITSIM, "Cabling • Termination Practices"Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spoo s. • 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. o not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged • during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature befor dereeling. Heat • lamps shall not be used for heating. • 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) log service loop on each end of cable. • 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, 'Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull • tensions. • C. UTP Cable Installation: • 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to • maintain cable geometry. • D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: • 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. • 2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. • E. Open-Cable Installation: • 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces • with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. • 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. • 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact wth pipes, ducts, or . other potentially damaging items. • F. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. • G. Separation from EMI Sources: • 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating • unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, • including electrical power lines and equipment. • 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: . a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). • • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300- 10 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING . 271300- 11 • b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). • C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm). • 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and . unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: • a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-112 inches (64 mm). • b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). • C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). • 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power . lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: • • a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 • mm). C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). • 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 • WA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 . inches (127 mm). • • 3.5 FIRESTOPPING • A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413"Penetration Firestopping." • B. Comply with TIAJEIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems"Article. • 3.6 GROUNDING • A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" • Chapter. • B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. • C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing • at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar • with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. • • D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. • • • • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300- 11 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS BAC BONE CABLING 271300- 12 • 3.7 IDENTIFICATION . A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-6 -A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553"Identification for lectrical Systems." . 1. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. • B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 'Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For • fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Comply with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal abling" for cable • and asset management software. D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List • incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinaf ns. Protect with • rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of fin I comprehensive schedules for Project. • E. Cable and Wire Identification: • 1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination an tap, where it is • accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indi ted. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required t be numbered at • device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected an numbered within • panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: La el each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet(4.5 m). • 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. • a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify • each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or ca inet to a building- mounted device with name and number of particular device ass own. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. - 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiri Closets: Label • each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and con ecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data com unication cabling, • use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. • F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area a d font color that • contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA! IA 606-A, for the • following: • 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent. • • 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Testing AgencyEngage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspec.ions. • B. Perform tests and inspections. • • C. Tests and Inspections: • • • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 12 • • • JEFFERSON MMUN CATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 13 • 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with . TIA/EIA-568-6.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. • Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in 'Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. • 4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. • Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. . D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. • G. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 271300 • COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300- 13 • JEFFERSON COUNTY HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500- 1 SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING iPART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. • 2. 62.51125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling. 3. Coaxial cable. 4. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies. 5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 6. Telecommunications outle/connectors. 7. Cabling system identification products. • 8. Cable management system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 2. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security"for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. • B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. r i C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. F. LAN: Local area network. G. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors. • H. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500- 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& R CORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS HORI ONTAL CABLING 271500-2 I. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. J. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. • 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cablin with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of p wer receptacles at each work area. • 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type u;ed: a. Nominal OD. . b. Minimum bending radius. C. Maximum pulling tension. • B. Shop Drawings: • 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedule! , in software and • format selected by Owner. 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules t iat are part of the • cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. C. Patch cords. . 5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and st ow elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. • • 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer,qualified layout technician, installation su ervisor, and field • inspector. • B. Source quality-control reports. C. Field quality-control reports. • • 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance mai uals. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-2 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 3 • B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. • 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective . covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. ! 3. Device Plates: One of each type. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawingsby an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of [Level 2 ! Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at • Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. • B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise . on-site testing. ! 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. ! 1. Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlightor optical loss test set. 2. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss ! value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. 3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. PART 2- PRODUCTS • 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION • A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-3 ! • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & R CORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS HORI ONTAL CABLING 271500 -4 • the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting ha r ware are called a i '.permanent link,"a term that is used in the testing protocols. • 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunication outlet/connectors • be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or onsolidation point • between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outl Uconnector. • 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling. i B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m), and includes the comp nents that extend i from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment. • C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This n aximum allowable i length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) o the workstation • equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect. • 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS i • A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmi sion standards in • TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard. i B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualif ed testing agency. • Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. • 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25or less. • 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450or less. • C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as d fined in NFPA 70, • by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applicatio 1. i D. Grounding: Comply withJ-STD-607-A. • • 2.3 BACKBOARDS i A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 • mm). Comply with requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" fo plywood backing • panels. • 2.4 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manu cturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are n t limited to, the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roduct indicated i on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: i 1. ADC. • 2. Belden Inc. i 3. Berk-Tek: a Nexans company. 4. CommScope. Inc. • • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-4 • i • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING • 271500-5 • 5. Draka Cableteg USA 6. Genesis Cable Products Honeywell International, Inc. • 7. Mohawk: a division of Belden Networking Inc. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. SYSTIMAX Solutions a CommScope Inc. brand. 10. 3M Communication Markets Division. • 11. Tyco Electronics Corporation: AMP Products. • C. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blue • thermoplastic jacket. • 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIAlEIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIAIEIA-568-B.2, [Category 5e] [Category 6]. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: • • a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG[; or MPP, CMP, MPR, CMR, MP,or MPG]. • b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP[or MPP], complying with NFPA 262. C. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR[; or MPP, CMP, or MPR], complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX[; or MPP, CMP, MPR, CMR, MP, MPG,CM, or CMG]. • e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG[; or MPP or MPR]. • f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. . g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR[or MPP], complying with UL 1666. 2.5 UTP CABLE HARDWARE • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products • that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following]: • B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated • on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: • 1. ADC. • 2. American Technology Systems Industries Inc. • 3. Belden Inc. 4. Dvnacom Inc. 5. Hubbell Premise Wiring. • 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Molex Premise Networks: a division of Molex. Inc. 8. Panduit Coro. 9. Siemon Co. (The). • 10. Tyco Electronics Corporation: AMP Products. C. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIAlEIA-568-B.2. IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with • connecting hardware of same category or higher. • D. Connecting Blocks: 1110-style IDC for Category 5e] [710-style IDC for Category 6] [66-style • IDC for Category 5e]. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus • • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& R CORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORI ONTAL CABLING 271500-6 • [25] Ansert number> percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks • where indicated. • E. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate uilding cables and • permit interconnection between cables. • 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned c bles. • F. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. . 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One <for each four-pair [UTP cable indi ated] [conductor • group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions dequate to suit • specified expansion criteria]. G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular r ptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. H. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch (900 mm) lengt s; terminated with • eight-position modular plug at each end. • 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-code J icons to ensure • Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards o protect against • snagging. • 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification. • 2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE • • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manu acturers offering • products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are n t limited to, the following: • B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roduct indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Belden Inc. • 2. Berk-Tek: a Nexans company. • 3. CommScope Inc. • 4. Corning Cable Systems. 5. CSI Technologies Inc. • 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. . 7. Mohawk: a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 8. Superior Essex Inc. • 9. SYSTIMAX Solutions a CommScope, Inc. brand. • 10. 3M Communication Markets Division. 11. Tyco Electronics Corporation: AMP Products. • C. Description: Multimode, 62.51125-micrometer, 24-fiber, tight buffer, optical fit er cable. • 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. • 3. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying • with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 -6 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING • 271500 -7 • a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. C. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. • d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262. f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666. 4. Conductive cable shall be steel armored type. 5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm, • 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm. . D. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Orange for 62.51125-micrometer cable. • 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm). 2.7 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the • following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. ADC. . 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. . 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. Corning Cable Systems. 6. CSI Technologies Inc. • 7. Dynacom Inc. 8. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 9. Molex Premise Networks a division of Molex In . 10. Siemon Co. (The). C. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable • connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, • plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. D. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch (900-mm) lengths. E. Cable Connecting Hardware: r • 1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards(FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplexconnectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB. • 3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& R CORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORI ONTAL CABLING • 271500-8 • 2.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS • A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply • with TIAIEIA-568-B.1. • B. Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in singleface late. • 1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Secti n 262726 'Wiring • Devices." • 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UT , optical fiber, and • coaxial work area cords. a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. 3. Legend: Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving. • 4. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label. 5. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper insert . • • 2.9 GROUNDING • A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for lectrical Systems" • for grounding conductors and connectors. • B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. • • 2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS • • A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating • adhesives, and inks used by label printers. • B. Comply with requirements in Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Syst ms." • 1. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer. • 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • • A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. • B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B 1. • C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. • • D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TI EIA-568-B.3. • E. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. S eep test shall test • the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by ge erating a voltage • whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphin the results. F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. • • • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500- 8 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING • 271500-9 • PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by • communications service provider. • • 3.2 WIRING METHODS • A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and . counters. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 270528"Pathways for Communications Systems." • 3. Comply with requirements in Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems." • B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: • 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturers limitations on bending radii. • 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. . 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. • 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES • A. Comply with NECA 1. • B. General Requirements for Cabling: • • 1. Comply with TIAlEIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. • 5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to • telecommunications outlet/connectors: a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or • for direct connection to workstation equipment. b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet (15 m) from communications • equipment room. 6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations • only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. • 7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. • 8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. • • • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-9 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&R CORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORI ONTAL CABLING 271500 - 10 • 9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without excee ing manufacturers • limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BIC I ITStM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution sp ols. 0 10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. o not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged • during installation and replace it with new cable. • 11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature befor dereeling. Heat • lamps shall not be used for heating. 12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) to g service loop on • each end of cable. 13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, 'Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull • tensions. • C. UTP Cable Installation: • 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. • 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the poii t of termination to • maintain cable geometry. • D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: • 1. Comply with TIAIEIA-568-B.3. • 2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabini t mounted. • E. Open-Cable Installation: • 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces • with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inch s (200 mm) above • ceilings by cable supports not more than [60 inches(1524 mm)]apart. • 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact wit pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. • F. Separation from EMI Sources: • 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and • data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including ele trical power lines • and equipment. • 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmet Ilic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as folio s: • a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 i ches(127 mm). • b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 • mm). • C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm). • 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metalli raceways and • unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA. A minimum ol 2-112 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimurr of 6 inches (150 • mm). • c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). • • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500- 10 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING . 271500- 11 • 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: • a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. • b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). C.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). • 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 • WA or HP and Larger. A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). • 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 . inches(127 mm). • 3.4 FIRESTOPPING • A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413"Penetration Firestopping." • B. Comply with TIA-569-13, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems"Article. • 3.5 GROUNDING • A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. • B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. • C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing • at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable • electrical building ground. • D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG • equipment grounding conductor. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with • requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 'Identification for Electrical Systems." • 1. Administration Class: [1] [2] [3] [4]. . 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, • connections, covers, and labels. B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric • designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions. • • • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500- 11 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • COMMUNICATIONS HORI ONTAL CABLING 271500- 12 • C. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 'Interior Painting" for paintin backboards. For • fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA 06-A for[Class 2] • [Class 3] [Class 4] level of administration[, including optional identificatio requirements of this standard]. E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and iring closet. List • incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinatons. Protect with • rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of fi al comprehensive schedules for Project. • F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling a ministration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecomm nications closets, [backbone pathways and cables,] [entrance pathways and cables,] to inal hardware and • positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. • Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by wrier. • G. Cable and Wire Identification: • 1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is • accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indic led. • 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required t be numbered at • device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected an numbered within panel or cabinet. • 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m). 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or nel. • a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal trips, and identify • each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or ca inet to a building- • mounted device shall be identified with name and number of p rticular device as • shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. • 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiri g Closets: Label • each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and con acting hardware. • Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data com unication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. • 6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the M TOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA I bel. • H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area a d font color that • contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EI -606-A. • 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent. • • 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and insp lions. • B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service represe tative to test and • inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. • • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500- 12 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING . 271500 - 13 • C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification • markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet1connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent • faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. • a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in 'Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: • a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer • for channel or link test configuration. • b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: • 1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. • 2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 6. UTP Performance Tests: • a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: • 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. . 4) Near-end crosstalk(NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk(PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far end crosstalk(ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk(PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. • 7. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 8. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Section 274133 "Master Antenna Television System" COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 13 i • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX COMMUNICATIONS HORIZ NTAL CABLING 271500- 14 9. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and opt cal fiber systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation ou et/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service h s been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation poin . Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, m ke and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology tall has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to th network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network o ensure proper connection to the network. . D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from th instrument to the • computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and in pections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide softwar support for two years. B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. I stall and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Subs ntial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall includ new or revised • licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to sy tem and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to trainOwner's maint nance personnel • in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and . revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. END OF SECTION 271500 • COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500- 14 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND • SECURITY • 280613 - 1 • SECTION 280513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND • SECURITY • • PART 1 -GENERAL • • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • • 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: • 1. Fire alarm wire and cable. 2. Identification products. • • 1.3 DEFINITIONS • . A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. • B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. • C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. • E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the • studs of a wall cavity). F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer, 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each type of product. • 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: • a. Nominal OD. • b. Minimum bending radius. • C. Maximum pulling tension. • • 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. • • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRO IC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 -2 . B. Source quality-control reports. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an CDD to supervise on-site testing. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end t end. Use optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set. • 2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain refiecto eter to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; includ the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. • 3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold amaged. 1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, ut are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials. • B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and c axial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and tempo ry HVAC system • is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualifi d testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. • 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. • B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as de ned in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513-2 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND • SECURITY • 280513 - 3 • . 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 314 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000"Rough Carpentry." 6k • 2.3 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the . following : 1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cabletea USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products: Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire. B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760. C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification Cl, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying —r with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating. T D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFNITHHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum -ti rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS L A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Brady Worldwide Inc. 2. HellermannTvton North America. -� 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp. B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. C. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513-3 _q • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTROI 11C SAFETY AND SECURITY • 280513 -4 • • 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B 1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. , D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TI EIA-568-B.3. • E. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. S eep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by ge erating a voltage �r whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphin the results. F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. r� PART 3- EXECUTION l_ 3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Elec rical Systems"for installation of supports for cables. 3.2 WIRING METHOD — A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways. 1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch . Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and - Security." 3. Comply with requirements in Section 260536"Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of en losure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted ii any enclosure – associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513-4 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND • SECURITY • 280513 - 5 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal • blocks, or plug connectors. • • 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES • A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. C. General Requirements for Cabling: • 1. Comply with TIAIEIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." • 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make • terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 • inchesand not more than 6 inchesfrom cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, • and terminals. 5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's • limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling • Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable • between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. • 7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat • lamps shall not be used for heating. 8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull • tensions. • D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent • with Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed • and linked signal paths, end to end. • 1. Comply with TIAIEIA-568-B.2. • 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 112 inchfrom the point of termination to maintain • cable geometry. • E. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: • • 1. Comply with TIAIEIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. • • F. Open-Cable Installation: • 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. • 2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inchesabove ceilings • by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or • other potentially damaging items. • • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513- 5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY • 280513-6 • G. Separation from EMI Sources: • 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for sep rating unshielded • copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI ources, including • electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and • unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: • a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 i ches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. • C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. • 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metall c raceways and • unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: • a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. • b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. • 4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical • equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: • a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. • b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. • C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 riches. • 5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and • Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. • 6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION • A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260523 "Raceways and • Boxes for Electrical Systems." • 1. Install plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. • 2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any • other wire or cable. • C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limit d conductors as • recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right a gles to sides and • back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal poin s with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclos re associated with • the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to t e system's wiring • diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade I gs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. • D. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the no al building power • wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color- • • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513-6 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND • SECURITY • 280513-7 code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different • colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers • red. • E. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser • does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones. F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for • connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. • • 3.5 CONNECTIONS • A. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 'Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System for • connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. • • 3.6 FIRESTOPPING • A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413"Penetration Firestopping." • B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A. • • C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. • • 3.7 GROUNDING • A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, • Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. • B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding • and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.8 IDENTIFICATION • A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with • requirements for identification specified in Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Perform the following tests and inspections: • 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification • markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. • 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment • and patch cords, and labeling of all components. • • • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 7 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY • 280513-8 • B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is • formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data ff Dm the instrument • to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and in 5pections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. • • END OF SECTION 280513 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 8 • • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY • 280526 - 1 • SECTION 280526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND • SECURITY • • PART 1 - GENERAL • • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • • 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: • 1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. • 3. Grounding busbars. • • 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. Signal Ground: The ground reference point designated by manufacturer of the system that is • considered to have zero voltage. • • 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. • • PART 2- PRODUCTS • • 2.1 CONDUCTORS • • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • • 1. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 2. Panduit Corp • 3. Tyco Electronics Corp. • B. Comply with UL 486A-4866. C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83. 1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6AWG, 19- strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire. • • • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526- 1 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFE AND SECURITY 280526-2 D. Bare Copper Conductors: • 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. • 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor and 114 inch in • diameter. • 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminE led with two-hole • copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. • 2.2 CONNECTORS • • A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as comp) ing with NFPA 70 • for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items cc nnected. Comply with UL 486A-486B. • B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available man ifacturers offering • products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 1. Bumdv: Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products. Inc. • 3. Hamer Lightning and Grounding. • 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. • C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bon to the conductor • when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 46 . • 1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped. • D. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression o exothermic-type mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 518- or 'I, centers for a two-bolt connection to the busbar. E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by ki manufacturer for • materials being joined and installation conditions. • • 2.3 GROUNDING BUSBARS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available mani facturers offering • products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: • 1. Chatsworth Products. Inc. • 2. Harger Lightning and Grounding. • 3. Panduit Corp. • B. Grounding Busbars: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 114 by 2 inches in • cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with J-STD-607-A. • 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. • 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch • • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526-2 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280626 - 3 • 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600 V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. • C. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with J-STD-607-A. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this • Section. • 1. Cabinet-Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the cabinet. 2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch equipment • racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless- steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack. 3. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar. 72 or 36 inchesstainless-steel or copper-plated hardware • for attachment to the rack. PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with IEEE 1100, 'Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic • Equipment." 1. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. 2. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit. B. Signal Ground: 1. For each system, establish the signal ground and label that location as such. 2. Bond the signal ground to the alternating-current (ac) power system service by connecting to one of the following listed locations, using insulated No. 6 AWG, stranded, Type THHN wire: a. Grounding bar in an electrical power panelboard if located in the same room or space as the signal ground. b. Telecommunications grounding busbar. C. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 APPLICATION • A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. • B. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: 1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, . and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees. 2. Install without splices. • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526-3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFE AND SECURITY 280526 -4 • 3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals. • • 3.3 CONNECTIONS • A. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars. B. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with man ifacturees written instructions and as follows: • 1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. • 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connecti ns. • C. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the signal ground. Co nply with TIAIEIA- • 568-B.1 and TIAIEIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables. • D. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or • rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the eq jipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section. • • 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Perform tests and inspections. • B. Tests and Inspections: • • 1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, • electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. • • D. Prepare test and inspection reports. • • END OF SECTION 280526 • • • • • • • • • • • • GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526-4 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK R RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY w 280528- 1 SECTION 280528 - PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary • Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. • 5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 6. Surface pathways. 7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. . 8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems. 2. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving communications systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. • 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. • B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. s 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS . A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: • 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 1 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFE AND SECURITY 280528-2 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of c nduit groups with • common supports. • B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. • C. Source quality-control reports. • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ is by one of the • following : • 1. AFC Cable Systems. Inc. • 2. Allied Tube &Conduit: a Tyco International Ltd. Co. • 3. Aloha Wire Company. • 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Company. • 6. O-Z/Gednev: a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 7. Picoma Industries: Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products. Inc. • 8. Republic Conduit. • 9. Robrov Industries 10. Southwire Company. • 11. Thomas& Betts Corporation. • 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 13. Wheatland Tube Company: a division of John Maneely Company. • B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: • • 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for • intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. • • D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. • F. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. • 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and • NFPA 70. • 2. Fittings for EMT: • a. Material: Steel. • b. Type: Setscrew or compression. • 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying wit UL 467, rated for • environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. • 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness oi 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. • • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 -2 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY i 280528- 3 . G. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube &Conduit: a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Arnco Corporation. • 5. CANTEX Inc. 6. CertainTeed Coro. 7. Condux International. Inc. • 8. Electri-Flex Company. 9. Kraloy. 10. Lamson & Sessions: Carlon Electrical Products. . 11. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 12. RACO: a Hubbell Company. 13. Thomas& Betts Corporation. B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: • 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC , complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. • E. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. F. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). • H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile • Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering • products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line. Inc. • 2. Hoffman: a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Souare D: a brand of Schneider Electric. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-3 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFET AND SECURITY 280528 -4 B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise , indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. • 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as define in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applicat on. 2. Comply with TIA-569-13. • C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion join s, adapters, hold- • down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wirewa s as required for ' complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. • • 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available man ifacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman: a Pentair comoanv. 3. Lamson & Sessions: Carton Electrical Products. . 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA. Inc. • B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: • 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agen y, and marked for intended location and application. • 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. • C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size a d shape, without • holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket mat rial and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be anged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. • D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, an having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. • E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, ad pters, hold-down • straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireway as required for • complete system. F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 an 550 g/L or less, respectively,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Metho 24). • G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and pro uct requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the esting of Volatile • Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental C ambers." • 2.5 SURFACE PATHWAYS . A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways: • • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 -4 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AOND SECURITY . 280528- 5 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. • 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect . • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers • offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • a. Mono-Systems, Inc. • b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA. Inc. C. Panduit Corp. . d. Wiremold/Legrand. • C. Surface Nonmetallic Pathways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and • manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing • characteristics. • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • a. Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Device-Kellems Division. b. Lamson &Sessions: Carlon Electrical Products. C. Mono-Systems, Inc. • d. Panduit Corp. • e. Wiremold 1 Legrand. 2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the • following : • 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company: Cooper Crouse-Hinds. • 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. • 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman: a Pentair company. • 6. Hubbell Incorporated: Killark Division. • 7. Lamson &Sessions: Carlon Electrical Products. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 9, Molex, Woodhead Brand • 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney: a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO: a Hubbell Company. 13. Robrov Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. . 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures: a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. • 17. Wiremold /Legrand. • • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-5 • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK&R11id ORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFE ND SECURITY 280528-6 B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: • 1. Comply with TIA-569-B. • 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be for use in wet locations. C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 614,k. w D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminL m, Type FD, with gasketed cover. • E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of ame material as • recessed box. • F. Metal Floor Boxes: • 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. • 2. Type: Fully adjustable . . 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and label d as defined in • NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for inten ed location and application. • G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round or rectangular. w 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and lab led as defined in • NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for inten ed location and • application. • H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. • I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast • aluminum with gasketed cover. • J. Device Box Dimensions: 4-inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep K. Gangable boxes are allowed . • L. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514 . w M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge • cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. • 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's s ndard enamel. • 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: • a. Material: Plastic . w b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. • 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard er amel. • N. Cabinets: • 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 , galvanized-steel box with removable interior par el and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-6 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-7 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION 40 A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: • 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC . 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT . ' 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC , . 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC . 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R . B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT . 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT . 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC . Pathway locations include the following: a. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. • b. Mechanical rooms. • 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric-Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet • locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC . 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: Plenum-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway . 8. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser- type, optical-fiber-cable pathway . • 9. Pathways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable: Plenum-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway . 10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch. D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this • type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and • apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 -7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFE AND SECURITY 280528-8 3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible con uit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. • E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. • • F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. . G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 d g F . • 3.2 INSTALLATION • A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirem nts except where • requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum • pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways al owed in specific , occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam i ir hot-water pipes. = Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. • • D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Eledrical Systems"for w hangers and supports. • E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished sl 3b. • F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for • communications wiring conduits for which only two 90-degree bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. • G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless of ierwise indicated. • Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. • H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. • 1. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main • reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place con uit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intery Is. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angle with expansion fittings. • 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approv d by Architect for • each specific location. • J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: • 1. Use EMT for pathways. • 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terr linated in hubs or in an enclosure. • • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-8 • • • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-9 K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. • L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes • or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts. • M. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install • locknuts hand tight plus 114 turn more. • N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings w in the locknut area prior to conduit assembly to assure a continuous ground path. O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length. • P. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use. • Q. Surface Pathways: • 1. Install surface pathway for surface electrical outlet boxes only where indicated on • Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not w exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. • R. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and . nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: • 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. • 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes • or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. w S. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway ! sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. • 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. . U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings. • • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-9 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX M PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFE AND SECURITY 280528 - 10 V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length thal exceeds 25 feet. • Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and th t has straight-run • length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature cha ge listed for each • of the following locations: • a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 d g F temperature • change. • b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temp rature change. C. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F • temperature change. • d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.013041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal condui . • 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross bui ding or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and pisto setting selected • according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at speci is location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movemen . W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use maximum of 7 inches of flexible • conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject t vibration, noise • transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage • 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe phy ical damage. X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes Eire not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. • Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a , raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. • Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spar ning two framing • members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by • conduits. • CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. • DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finishe floor surface. • • • PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528- 10 • • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY R 280528- 11 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as f temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. . b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS w A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling." 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." • 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528- 11 i JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1 SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY . A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Nonsystem smoke detectors. 5. Heat detectors. 6. Notification appliances. ! 7. Remote annunciator. B. Addressable interface device. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 10. Radio alarm transmitter. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light-emitting diode. B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. B. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. 1.5 SCOPE OF WORK A. Fire alarm device layouts and one-line diagram are for information only to indicate possible system configuration. The information shown is intended to be used as a guide by the contractor to complete their design and does not include all the necessary items for installation. ! The contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the fire alarm system in compliance with these specifications, NFPA 72, and local codes. The contractor shall prepare fire alarm system drawings sealed by a fire protection engineer for submittal to the authority having jurisdiction and to be used for construction as part of their scope of work. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1 w i JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -2 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS w A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sec ions, details, and w attachments to other work. 1. Comply with NFPA 72 and Annex recommendations. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. w 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. C. General Submittal Requirements: w 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to ubmitting them to w Architect. w 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualific tions: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system desig b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. w C. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. w D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicate to comply with w performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ra ngs of each, and w installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the de ctor. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacinc and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. w 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS w A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. • w 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and compon nts to include in w emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to it ms specified in • Section 017823"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the 'Inspection, Testing and Mai tenance"Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Provide 'Record of Completion Documents' according to NFPA 72 rticle 'Permanent Records' in the"Records" Section of the"Inspection, Testing and Maint nanoe" Chapter. • 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFRA 72 article of the same name and include the following: • a. Frequency of testing of installed components. w DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -2 w • w • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -3 b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. C. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals. 5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm 0 Level III technician. 40 C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from 40 single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an FMG-approved alarm company. 1.10 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program . software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. • DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 3 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -4 PART 2- PRODUCTS • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produ ts by one of the following : 1. GAMEWELL; a Honeywell company. 2. GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company. • 3. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. . 4. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 5. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company. • 6. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company. 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices an I systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. . 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. w 5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. • B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: w 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. . 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system. . 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fi a-alarm mode. 8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter sm ke-control system panel. 9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct s stems. 10. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. . 11. Record events in the system memory. C. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following device and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervis ry signal-initiating • devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. . 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. • 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator D. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -4 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 5 ! 2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with ® electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL. a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable ! programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. ! b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and • printer. ! 2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status. a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting. ! b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. ! 3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment. B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-Mstal type, 1 line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. . C. Circuits: ! 1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A. • a. Initiating Device Circuits: [Style D] [Style E]. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. • C. Signaling Line Circuits: (Style 21[Style 51[Style 61 [Style 71. d. Install no more than [50] <Insert number> addressable devices on each signaling ! line circuit. 2. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B. ! a. Initiating Device Circuits: [Style A] [Style B] [Style C]. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: [Style W] [Style X] [Style Y]. ! C. Signaling Line Circuits: [Style 0.5] [Style 1] [Style 3] [Style 3.5] [Style 4] ! [Style 4.5]. d. Install no more than [50] <Insert number> addressable devices on each signaling line circuit. ! 3. Serial Interfaces: [Two] <Insert numbers RS-232 ports for printers. D. Smoke-Alarm Verification: DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 5 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX . DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -6 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control w unit. 2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector. ! 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm i not verified. E. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a three-pulse tempor I pattern. F. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke det ctors at doors in ! smoke barrier walls shall not be connected to fire-alarm system. . G. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select sp cific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity se ings, and change • those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-schedul d, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and ! sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer. H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit larm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. 1. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication syste with redundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided [in a separate cabinet located in the fire command center] [as a special module that is part of irealarm control ! unit]. ! 1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous trans ission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of anno ncements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by ! an NRTL. . a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated numb r of zones and, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or i any combination. b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. C. Standard digitally recorded messages for"Evacuation"and "All tear." d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of noti ication appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 2. Status Annunciator. Indicate the status of various voice/alarm spea er zones and the ! status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones. 3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure. J. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and troubl events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trOL ble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditi ns in the system and a historical log of events. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -6 w JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX w DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -7 K. Primary Power: 24-V do obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Inifiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V do source. w 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power- s supply module rating. w L. Secondary Power: 24-V do supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and w automatic transfer switch. w 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium . M. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. w N. Fire alarm control panel shall have a"push to silence alarm" button. w 2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key-or wrench-operated switch. 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS w A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be[four] [two]-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. • 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated[and power- , on status]. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. w b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be satiable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. • DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -7 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -8 w C. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: t. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit an J shall be able to identify the detectors location within the system and its sensitivity settir g. w 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to . manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. • b. Device type. C. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. w e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to , identify the detectors location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access lev I, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector. a. Primary status. b. Device type. • C. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL isted for use with the supplied detector. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manuf, cturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. 2.6 HEAT DETECTORS A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. i B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature f 135 deg F or a . rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector base . 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector stat s (normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. 1♦ C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F . 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector base . 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector sta s (normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. • D. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 8 JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -9 1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F . NRTL listed for "regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature. 2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control unit. 3. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite 'trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit as separately identified zones. 4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. 2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single- mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. B. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output. C. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-d BA minimum rated output. D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in . minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens. 1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. . 2. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. + 3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, [red] [white]. F. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances: ai 1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 4. Mounting: [Flush] [semirecessed] [or] [surface mounted and bidirectional]. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker r location. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 -9 r • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RE ORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 10 2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS • A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate. 1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding f rce. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. . 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. 2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR . A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, . supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1. B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LE indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. 2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. B. Integral Relay. Capable of providing a direct signal to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown . 2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL. B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or troubl signal from fire- alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 second , transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of tel hone line to the • remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall a tomatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on bot telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal. C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following: 1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 10 i JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK 8, RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM • 283111 - 11 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit. D. Digital data transmission shall include the following: 1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power. 5. Low battery. 6. Abnormal test signal. A 7. Communication bus failure. E. Secondary Power. Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. • F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. 2.12 DEVICE GUARDS A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment. B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on concrete base with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install seismic bracing. Comply with requirements in Section 260548 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise . indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 11 A • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RE ORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 12 • D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the . finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 . 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." E. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the ouilding. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supe ising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing [control] [monitoring] equipment as ' necessary to extend existing [control] [monitoring] functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system. F. Smoke-or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors"Section in the'Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the 'Initiating Devices" • Chapter, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet . 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling constru tion, and for high A ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A[or Append x B]in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or retum-air opening. M 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from an part of a lighting fixture. G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install samr ling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. • H. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler w rating and location. . I. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the w alarm in all smoke alarms to sound. J. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector a d each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible fro normal viewing position. K. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the iling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mec anism concealed ` behind a grille. • L. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 • inches below the ceiling. • M. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device the monitor. N. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. . DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 12 • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK& RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM w 283111 - 13 • O. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. • 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. 2. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 3. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION ® A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." • B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction . B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance"column and list only the installed components. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 13 • • JEFFERSON COUNTY CLERK & RECORDER ANNEX DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 14 . 2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testi g" Section of the • "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturers written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 • requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's . written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to mar ufacturers written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of • Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form' in the 'Records" ` Section of the"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. • E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper ope ration of added or . replaced devices and appliances. • F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. • G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed fo weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and i spections. • I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completi n, test fire-alarm • system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFRA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. • 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. • END OF SECTION 283111 • • • • • • • • • • • • • DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 14 • • • COMcheck Software Version 3.9.2 w Envelope Compliance Certificate • w • 20091ECC • * Section 1: Project Information w Project Type:New Construction Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: 201 West Centennial Ave. Jefferson County SMA Architects Boulder,MT 59632 PO Box H 50 S.Last Chance Gulch-Suite 1 Boulder,MT 59632 Bozeman,MT 59601 2253024 406.4424933 kgntf @archgects-sma.com • Section 2: General Information • Building Location(for weather data): Boulder,Montana • Climate Zone: 6b Building Space Conditioning Typs(s): Nonresidential Vertical Glazing/Wag Area Pd: 11% Activity Tyoedsl Floor Ana Office 5332 w Section 3: Requirements Checklist Climate-Specific Requirements: w Component Name/Description Gross Cavity Cont. Proposed Budget Area or R-Value R-Value 1.1-Factor U-Factorpl • Perimeter Root 1:Attic Root with Wood Joists 5332 49.0 0.0 0.021 0.027 Exterior Wall 1:Wood-Framed,16"o.c. 3972 21.0 0.0 0.062 0.051 w Window 1:Other Window,Clear,SHGC 0.38 333 --- -- 0300 0350 Door 1:Glass(>50%glazing):Metai Frame,Entrance Door,SHGC 112 --- --- 0.290 0.800 0.38,PF 0.75 Floor 1:Slab-On-Grade:Unheated,Vertical ft. 331 •-• 10.0 --- -- (a)Budget U-tactors are used for software baseline calculations ONLY,and are not code requirements. Air Leakage,Component Certification, and Vapor Retarder Requirements: 1. Ail joints and Penetrations are caulked,gasketed or covered with a moisture vapor-permeable wrapping material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. )3�2. Windows,doors,.and skylights certified as meeting leakage requirements. • .�+�'. Component R-values&U-faqirs labeled as certified. No roof insulation is installed on a suspended ceiling with removable ceiling panels. 5. 'Other'components have supporting documentation for proposed U-Factors. w06. Insulation installed according to manufacturer's instructions,in substantial contact with the surface being insulated,and in a manner that achieves the rated R-value without compressing the insulation. lit 7. Stair,elevator shaft vents,and other outdoor air Intake and exhaust openings in the building envelope are equipped with motorized dampers t� 88. Cargo doors and loading dock doors are weather sealed. t-t(k Project Title:Jefferson County Clark& Recorder Annex Report date:02112/14 Data filename:S:\1311311 -JCCR Annex\Project Managemenl\COMCheckUCCR Envelope COMChec k.cck Page 1 of 2 L 9. Recessed lighting fixtures installed in the building envelope are Type IC rated as meeting ASTM E283,ar, sealed with gasket or caulk. • imS t O.Buikling entrance doors have a vestibule equipped with sett-dosing devices. Exceptions: ❑ Building entrances with revolving doors. • ❑ Doors not intended to be used as a building entrance. • ❑ Doors that open directly from a space less than 3000 sq.ft.in area. ❑ Doors used primarily to facilitate vehicular movement or materials handling and adjacent personnel d rs. . ❑ Doors opening directly from a sleeping/dwelling unit. Section 4: Compliance Statement .Compliance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this document is consistent with the build ng plans,specifications • and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed envelope system has been designed to meet the 2009 IECC requirements In COMcheck Version 3.9.2 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements C hecklist. �''- -°'---i--.�- _�-- Name-Title T Signature D its • • Project Tnle:Jefferson County Clerk& Recorder Annex Report date:02/12/14 Data filename:SAM1311 -JCCR Annex%Project MaragemantrOMChedNCCR Envelope COMCheck.cck Page 2 of 2 • • rCOM check Software Version 3.9.2 Mechanical Compliance Certificate • • • 20091ECC • • Section is Project Information • Project Type: New Construction 0 Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk& Recorder Annex Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: 201 West Centennial Ave. Jefferson County MKK Consulting Engineers Boulder,MT 59632 PO Box H PO Box 9643 Boulder,MT 59632 Helena,MT 59604 • 225-4024 406-436-1467 • cdrake @mkkeng.com • Section 2: General Information • Building Location(for weather data): Boulder,Montana • Climate Zone: 6b Section 3: Mechanical Systems List 0 Quantity System Tvbe&Description 1 F/CU-1 (Single Zone): • Heating: 1 each-Central Furnace,Gas,Capacity=94 kBtu/h Proposed Efficiency=95.00%Et, Required Efficiency=80.00%Et Cooling:1 each-Split System,Capacity=42 kBtu/h,Air-Cooled Condenser • Proposed Efficiency=14.00 SEER,Required Efficiency=13.00 SEER Fan System: F-1 --Compliance(Motor nameplate HP method): Passes • Fans: FAN 1 Supply,Constant Volume,1945 CFM,1 motor nameplate hp • 1 F/CU-2(Single Zone): Heating: 1 each-Central Furnace,Gas,Capacity=84 kBtuth • Proposed Efficiency=95.000/6 Et,Required Efficiency=80.00%Et Cooling: 1 each-Split System,Capacity=37 kBtu/h,Air-Cooled Condenser Proposed Efficiency=14.00 SEER,Required Efficiency=13.00 SEER Fan System: F-1 -Compliance(Motor nameplate HP method):Passes Fans: • FAN 1 Supply,Constant Volume, 1945 CFM,1 motor nameplate hp 1 F/CU-3(Single Zone): Heating:1 each-Central Furnace,Gas,Capacity=97 kBtu/h Proposed Efficiency=95.00%Et, Required Efficiency=80.00%Et Cooling:1 each-Split System,Capacity=43 kBtu/h,Air-Cooled Condenser Proposed Efficiency=14.00 SEER, Required Efficiency=13.00 SEER Fan System: F-1 --Compliance(Motor nameplate HP method):Passes Fans: • FAN 1 Supply,Constant Volume,1945 CFM, 1 motor nameplate hp 3 ECH-1,2,3(Unknown): Heating:3 each-Unit Heater,Electric,Capacity=10 kBtufn No minimum efficiency requirement applies Fan System: None ~] 1 DWH-1: • Gas Instantaneous Water Heater,Capacity:0 gallons,Input Rating:199 Bluth Proposed Efficiency:0.97 EF,Required Efficiency:0.67 EF • • • Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Report date:02/15/14 Data filename:C.,Wrive12013.03.0027-Jefferson County Office AddltiontEngr\Comcheck\JOCR Mechanical COMCheck.cck Page 1 of 3 Section 4: Requirements Checklist r Requirements Specific To: F/CU-1 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace(Gas): 80.00%Et(or 78%AFUE) 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.00 SEER Requirements Specific To: F/CU-2 : 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace(Gas): 80.00%Et(or 78%AFUE) • Do 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.00 SEER . Requirements Specific To: F/CU-3 : , ffi 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace(Gas): 80.00%Et(or 78%AFUE) ® 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.00 SEER Requirements Specific To: ECH-1,2,3 : w None Requirements Specific To: DWH-1 1. Water heating equipment meets minimum efficiency requirements: Gas Instantaneous Water Heater If ciency: 0.67 EF (� 2. First 8 ft of outlet piping is insulated Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is ppiicable: 1. Plant equipment and system capacity no greater than needed to meet loads • Exception(s): p Standby equipment automatically off when primary system is operating • Q Multiple units controlled to sequence operation as a function of load 2. Minimum one temperature control device per system w NA❑ 3. Minimum one humidity control device per installed humidification/dehumidffication system 4. Load calculations per ASHRAE/ACCA Standard 183. 5. Automatic Controls:Setback to 55°F(heat)and 85°F(cool);7-day clock,2-hour occupant override, 10-h ur backup r Exception(s): Continuously operating zones • 6. Outside-air source for ventilation;system capable of reducing OSA to required minimum .Xl 7. R-5 supply and return air duct insulation in unconditioned spaces R-8 supply and return air duct insulation outside the building R-8 insulation between ducts and the building exterior when ducts are part of a building assembly Exception(s): L] Ducts located within equipment • E] Ducts with interior and exterior temperature difference not exceeding 15°F. 8. Mechanical fasteners and sealants used to connect ducts and air distribution equipment 9. Ducts sealed-longitudinal seams on rigid ducts;transverse seams on all ducts;UL 181A or 181 B tapes and mastics • NA❑ 10.Hot water pipe insulation: 1.5 in.for pipes<=1.5 in.and 2 in.for pipes>1.5 in. Chilled water/refrigerant/brine pipe insulation: 1.5 in.for pipes<=1.5 in.and 1.5 in.for pipes>1.5 in. Steam pipe insulation: 1.5 in.for pipes<=1.5 in.and 3 in.for pipes >1.5 in. Exception(s): D Piping within HVAC equipment. D Fluid temperatures between 55 and 105T. • p Fluid not heated or cooled with renewable energy. L) Piping within room fan-coil(with AHRI440 rating)and unit ventilators(with AHRI840 rating). • Runouts<4 ft in length. 11.Operation and maintenance manual provided to building owner ❑ 12,Thermostatic controls have 5°F deadband Exception(s): . N Thermostats requiring manual changeover between heating and cooling • Z] Special occupancy or special applications where wide temperature ranges are not acceptable and are approved by the authority • having jurisdiction. 13.Balancing devices provided in accordance with IMC(2006)603.17 14.Demand control ventilation(DCV)present for high design occupancy areas(>40 person/1000 f12 in spaces>500 ft2)and served by systems with any one of 1)an air-side economizer,2)automatic modulating control of the outdoor air d imper,or 3)a design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. • • Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk& Recorder Annex Report date:02/15114 • Data filename:C:I clrive%Xll 3.03.0027-Jefferson County Office Addition\Engr\Comcheck\JCCR Mechanical C MCheckock Page 2 of 3 • Excepacrr(s): ❑ Systems with heat recovery. ❑ Muttiple-zone systems without DOC of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. • ❑ Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfrn. ❑ Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 ctm. 15.Motorized,automatic shutoff dampers required on exhaust and outdoor air supply openings Exception(s): • ❑ Gravity dampers acceptable in buildings<3 stories 16.Automatic controls for freeze protection systems present NA❑ 17.Exhaust air heat recovery included for systems 5,000 ctm or greater with more than 70%outside air fraction or specifically exempted Excephon(s): • ❑ Hazardous exhaust systems,commercial kitchen and clothes dryer exhaust systems that the International Mechanical Code prohibits the use of energy recovery systems. ❑ Systems serving spaces that are heated and not cooled to less than 60°F. ❑ Where more than 60 percent of the outdoor heating energy is provided from site-recovered or site solar energy. ❑ Heating systems in climates with less than 3600 HDD. R ❑ Cuolktg systems in climates with a 1 percent cooling design wet-bulb temperature less than 64°F. • ❑ Systems requiring dehumidification that employ energy recovery in series with the cooling coil. ❑ laboratory fume hood exhaust systems that have either a variable air volume system capable of reducing exhaust and makeup air volume to 50 percent or less of design values or,a separate make up air supply meeting the following makeup air requirements: a)at least 75 percent of exhaust flow rate,b)heated to no more than 2°F below room setpoint temperature,c)cooled to no lower than 3°F above room setpoint temperature,d)no humidification added,e)no simultaneous heating and cooling. Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed mechanical design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed mechanical systems have been designed to meet the 2009 IECC . requirements in COMcheck Version 3.9.2 and to comply with the mecrl.mti in the Requirements Checklist. Chris Drake - Mechanical Eng. � kz 02/14/2014 • Name-Titre Signature Date Section 6: Post Construction Compliance Statement ❑ HVAC record drawings of the actual installation,system capacities,calibration information,and performance data for each equipment provided to the owner. ❑ HVAC O&M documents for all mechanical equipment and system provided to the owner by the mechanical contractor. ❑ Written HVAC balancing and operations report provided to the owner. The above post construction requirements have been completed. MPrincipal Mechanical Designer-Name Signature Date Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Report date:02/15/14 Data filename:C:ljdrive\2013.03.0027-Jefferson County Office AddHion\Engr\ComcheckUCCR Mechanical COMCheck.ock Page 3 of 3 • COMcheck Software Version 3.9.3 • Interior Lighting Compliance • Certificate • • 20091ECC Section 1: Project Information • Project Type:New Construction . Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: 201 West Centennial Ave. Jefferson County SMA Architects • Boulder,MT 59632 PO Box H 50 S.Last Chance Gulch-Suite 1 Boulder,MT 59632 Bozeman,MT 59601 225-4024 406-442-4933 • klintf @architects-sma.com Section 2: Interior Lighting and Power Calculation • A B C D Area Category Floor Area Allowed Allowed Watts • (tt2) Watts/ft2 (B x C) • Office 5332 1 5332 • Total Allowed Watts= 5332 Section 3: Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule • A B C D E Fixture ID:Description/Lamp/Wattage Per Lamp!Ballast Lamps/ #of Fixture (C X D) Fixture Fixtures Watt. • Linear Fluorescent 1:F1:48'T8 32W: Electronic: 2 38 60 2260 Linear Fluorescent 2:Ft E:48'T8 32W:Electronic: 2 9 60 540 Linear Fluorescent 3:F2:48'T8 32W:Electronic: 2 3 60 180 • Linear Fluorescent 4:F3:24'T8 17W:Electronic: 2 2 30 60 Linear Fluorescent 5:F4:24'TS 17W:Electronic: 2 4 30 120 . LED 1:Lt:LED Other Fixture Unit 28W: 1 4 28 112 LED 2:L2:LED PAR 18W: 1 15 18 270 • LED 3:1-3:Other: 1 55 3 165 • LED 4:1-5:LED PAR 16W: 1 9 16 144 0 Total Proposed Watts= 3871 • Section 4: Requirements Checklist • . . Lighting Wattage: • ® 1. Total proposed watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts. 16 Allowed Watts Proposed Watts Complies 5332 3871 YES 0 Controls, Switching, and Wiring: to Lj 2. Daylight zones under skylights more than 15 feet from the perimeter have lighting controls separate from daylight zones adjacent to vertical fenestration. • 3. Daylight zones have individual lighting controls independent from that of the general area lighting. 0 • Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Report date: 02/14/14 Data filename:J:\2013.03.0027 Jefferson County Office Addition\Engr\Comcheck\JCCR Lighting COMCheck.ock Page 1 of 4 Exceptions: • Contiguous daylight zones spanning no more than two orientations are allowed to be controlled by a sit gle controlling device. . p Daylight spaces enclosed by walls or ceiling height partitions and containing two or fewer light fixtures i re not required to have a separate switch for general area lighting. N 4. Independent controls for each space(switch/oocupancy sensor). • Exceptions: Areas designated as security or emergency areas that must be continuously illuminated. . Lighting in stairways or corridors that are elements of the means of egress. . 5. Master switch at entry to hoteVmotel guest room. O 6. Individual dwelling units separately metered. • 7. Medical task lighting or artlhistory,display lighting claimed to be exempt from compliance has a control de a independent of the control . of the nonexempt lighting. 8. Each space required to have a manual control also allows for reducing the connected lighting load by at I at 50 percent by either • controlling all luminaires,dual switching of alternate rows of luminaires,alternate luminaires,or alternate trips,switching the middle • lamp luminaires independently of other lamps,or switching each luminaire or each lamp. Exceptions. El Only one luminaire in space. • E] An occupant-sensing device controls the area. The area is a corridor,storeroom, restroom,public lobby or sleeping unit. . Areas that use less than 0.6 Watts/sq.ft. • ® 9. Automatic lighting shutoff control in buildings larger than 5,000 sq.ft. Exceptions: ❑ Sleeping units,patient care areas;and spaces where automatic shutoff would endanger safety or secu ity. ® 10.PhotooelVastronomical time switch on exterior lights. • Exceptions: p Lighting intended for 24 hour use. • ❑ 11.Tandem wired one-lamp and three-lamp ballasted luminaires(No single-lamp ballasts). • Exceptions: • p Electronic high-frequency ballasts; Luminaires on emergency circuits or with no available pair. • Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed lighting system has been designed to meet the 2009 IECC • requirements in COMcheck Version 3.9.3 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist. • Clint Laferriere - Electrical Engineer 2-14-2014 • Name-Title Sgnature D ate • • • • • • • M y Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Report date:02/14114 . Data filename:J:\2013.03.0027 Jefferson County Office AdditiontEngr\ComchecWCCR Lighting COMCheckx Page 2 of 4 • • • COMcheck Software Version 3.9.3 Exterior Lighting Compliance • A Certificate • 20091ECC Section 1: Project Information • Project Type:New Construction Project Title :Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex 0 Exterior Lighting Zone: 2(Neighborhood business district) • Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: 201 West Centennial Ave. Jefferson County SMA Architects • Boulder,MT 59632 PO Box H 50 S.Last Chance Gulch-Suite 1 Boulder,MT 59632 Bozeman, MT 59601 225-4024 406-442-4933 ldintf@architects-sma.com Section 2: Exterior Lighting Area/Surface Power Calculation • A 8 C D E F • Exterior Area/Surface Ouantity Allowed Tradable Allowed Proposed Watts Wattage Watts Watts /Unit (B x C) • Main entry 6 ft of door width 20 Yes 120 24 Other door(not main entry) 12 ft of door width 20 Yes 240 72 Total Tradable Watts`= 360 96 • Total Allowed Watts= 360 Total Allowed Supplemental Watts"= 600 0 Wattage tradeoffs are only allowed between tradable areas/surfaces. • "A supplemental allowance equal to 600 watts may be applied toward compliance of both non-tradable and tradable areas/surfaces. Section 3: Exterior Lighting Fixture Schedule A B C D E • Fixture ID:Description/Lamp/Wattage Per Lamp/Ballast Lamps/ k of Fixture (C X D) Fixture Fixtures Watt. a1 err($Aaif tlootwxi�ip�' afsp"(Napa9a` :-. LED 1 L4 Other: 1 �- 1 X24 24 Ytttl�r�ioar !fiainenbrf?)ri2 ti lmdebla�+mp_ MOM_ r' LED 2 L4 Other: 1 3 24 72 • Total Tradable Proposed Watts= 96 Section 4: Requirements Checklist Lighting Wattage: M 1. Within each non-tradable area/surface,total proposed watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts.Across all tradable areastsurfaces,total proposed watts must the less than or equal to total allowed wafts. • Compliance:Passes. • • Controls, Switching, and Wiring: ❑ 2. All exemption claims are associated with fixtures that have a control device independent of the control of the nonexempt lighting. 3. Lighting not designated for dusk-to-dawn operation is controlled by either a a photosensor(with time switch),or an astronomical time switch. • Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Report date:02/14/14 . Data filename:J:@013.03.0027 Jefferson County Office AdditioMEngnComcheck\JCCR Lighting COMCheck.ock Page 3 of 4 • 4. Lighting designated for dusk-to-dawn operation is controlled by an astronomical time switch or photosens r. • ❑ 5. All time switches are capable of retaining programming and the time setting during loss of power for a pe od of at least 10 hours. Exterior Lighting Efficacy: ❑ 6. All exterior building grounds luminaires that operate at greater than 10OW have minimum efficacy of 60 lu en/watt. Exceptions: • ❑ Lighting that has been claimed as exempt and is identified as such in Section 3 table above. ❑ Lighting that is specifically designated as required by a health or life safety statue,ordinance,or regul tion. ❑ Emergency lighting that is automatically off during normal building operation. • ❑ Lighting that is controlled by motion sensor. • Section 5: Compliance Statement • Compliance Statement The proposed exterior lighting design represented in this document is consistent with a building plans,specifications • and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed lighting system has been designed meet the 2009 IECC • requirements in COMcheck Version 3.9.3 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements hecklist. Clint Laferriere - Electrical Engineer u 02-14-2014 Name-Title Signature ate • • • w M • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Project Title:Jefferson County Clerk&Recorder Annex Report date: 02114/14 Data filename:J:12013.03.0027 Jefferson County Office Addftion\Engr\Comcheck\JCCR Lighting COMCheck ock Page 4 of 4 •